Prove2Me
Navigate
DiscoverCollectionsFormalpediaBlogsUsersMomentumMy Missions+
Prove2Me
⌕
Log in

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

Numerical Analysis

212 missions · 108 completed

Missions

Open104Completed108All212
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

A Nonmonotone Line Search Technique and Its Application to Unconstrained Optimization II: R-Linear Convergence for Strongly Convex FunctionsResearch Paper

Motivation

Line search methods for unconstrained minimization of a smooth function f:Rn→Rf : \mathbb{R}^n \to \mathbb{R}f:Rn→R choose a direction dkd_kdk​ and a step αk>0\alpha_k > 0αk​>0 and set xk+1=xk+αkdkx_{k+1} = x_k + \alpha_k d_kxk+1​=xk​+αk​dk​. Classical rules (Armijo, Wolfe) insist that every step decrease fff. For quasi-Newton and conjugate gradient directions this monotonicity requirement often forces short steps, and nonmonotone line searches, which only ask for a decrease relative to some reference value built from past iterates, have been used since Grippo, Lampariello and Lucidi (1986) to let such methods take longer steps.

Zhang and Hager (SIAM J. Optim., 2004) replaced the maximum of recent function values used by Grippo et al. with a weighted average CkC_kCk​ of all past function values. The paper proves two results: global convergence to stationary points (the companion mission) and, the subject of this mission, R-linear convergence of the function values when fff is strongly convex.

Timeline:

  • 1986, Grippo, Lampariello, Lucidi: nonmonotone line search based on the maximum of the last MMM function values; global convergence.
  • 2002, Dai: R-linear convergence of the max-based scheme for strongly convex fff.
  • 2004, Zhang and Hager: the averaged reference value CkC_kCk​; global convergence (Theorem 2.2) and R-linear convergence for strongly convex fff (Theorem 3.1).

Setting

Fix parameters 0≤ηmin⁡≤ηmax⁡≤10 \le \eta_{\min} \le \eta_{\max} \le 10≤ηmin​≤ηmax​≤1, 0<δ<σ<1<ρ0 < \delta < \sigma < 1 < \rho0<δ<σ<1<ρ and μ>0\mu > 0μ>0. Write gk=∇f(xk)g_k = \nabla f(x_k)gk​=∇f(xk​) and ∇f(x)d=⟨∇f(x),d⟩\nabla f(x)d = \langle \nabla f(x), d\rangle∇f(x)d=⟨∇f(x),d⟩. The Nonmonotone Line Search Algorithm (NLSA) keeps weights QkQ_kQk​ and reference values CkC_kCk​:

Q0=1,  Qk+1=ηkQk+1,C0=f(x0),  Ck+1=ηkQkCk+f(xk+1)Qk+1,Q_0 = 1,\ \ Q_{k+1} = \eta_k Q_k + 1,\qquad C_0 = f(x_0),\ \ C_{k+1} = \frac{\eta_k Q_k C_k + f(x_{k+1})}{Q_{k+1}},Q0​=1,  Qk+1​=ηk​Qk​+1,C0​=f(x0​),  Ck+1​=Qk+1​ηk​Qk​Ck​+f(xk+1​)​,

with ηk∈[ηmin⁡,ηmax⁡]\eta_k \in [\eta_{\min}, \eta_{\max}]ηk​∈[ηmin​,ηmax​] chosen freely at each step. A step αk\alpha_kαk​ is accepted either by the nonmonotone Wolfe conditions

f(xk+αkdk)≤Ck+δαkgkTdk,∇f(xk+αkdk)dk≥σgkTdk,f(x_k + \alpha_k d_k) \le C_k + \delta\alpha_k g_k^{\mathsf T} d_k,\qquad \nabla f(x_k + \alpha_k d_k) d_k \ge \sigma g_k^{\mathsf T} d_k,f(xk​+αk​dk​)≤Ck​+δαk​gkT​dk​,∇f(xk​+αk​dk​)dk​≥σgkT​dk​,

or by the nonmonotone Armijo rule αk=αˉkρhk\alpha_k = \bar\alpha_k \rho^{h_k}αk​=αˉk​ρhk​, where αˉk>0\bar\alpha_k > 0αˉk​>0 is a trial step and hkh_khk​ is the largest integer such that the first inequality holds and αk≤μ\alpha_k \le \muαk​≤μ. With ηk=0\eta_k = 0ηk​=0 one recovers the monotone rules.

The direction assumption asks for constants c1,c2>0c_1, c_2 > 0c1​,c2​>0 with gkTdk≤−c1∥gk∥2g_k^{\mathsf T} d_k \le -c_1\|g_k\|^2gkT​dk​≤−c1​∥gk​∥2 and ∥dk∥≤c2∥gk∥\|d_k\| \le c_2\|g_k\|∥dk​∥≤c2​∥gk​∥. The function fff is strongly convex with constant γ>0\gamma > 0γ>0 if

f(x)≥f(y)+∇f(y)(x−y)+12γ∥x−y∥2for all x,y.f(x) \ge f(y) + \nabla f(y)(x - y) + \frac{1}{2\gamma}\|x - y\|^2\quad\text{for all } x, y.f(x)≥f(y)+∇f(y)(x−y)+2γ1​∥x−y∥2for all x,y.

Let x∗x^*x∗ be the minimizer, L={x:f(x)≤f(x0)}\mathcal L = \{x : f(x) \le f(x_0)\}L={x:f(x)≤f(x0​)}, dmax⁡=sup⁡k∥dk∥d_{\max} = \sup_k\|d_k\|dmax​=supk​∥dk​∥, and Lˉ\bar{\mathcal L}Lˉ the set of points within distance μdmax⁡\mu d_{\max}μdmax​ of L\mathcal LL.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.1

Let fff be strongly convex with minimizer x∗x^*x∗, let ∇f\nabla f∇f be Lipschitz continuous on bounded sets, let ηmax⁡<1\eta_{\max} < 1ηmax​<1, let the directions satisfy the direction assumption at every iteration, and let αk≤μ\alpha_k \le \muαk​≤μ for all kkk. Then there is θ∈(0,1)\theta \in (0,1)θ∈(0,1) with

f(xk)−f(x∗)≤θk(f(x0)−f(x∗))for each k.f(x_k) - f(x^*) \le \theta^k\big(f(x_0) - f(x^*)\big)\quad\text{for each } k.f(xk​)−f(x∗)≤θk(f(x0​)−f(x∗))for each k.

The goal fixes no value of θ\thetaθ: it asserts only the existence of a linear rate.

Milestones

In the paper's order of use:

  1. Lemma 1.1: f(xk)≤Ck≤Akf(x_k) \le C_k \le A_kf(xk​)≤Ck​≤Ak​ when gkTdk≤0g_k^{\mathsf T}d_k \le 0gkT​dk​≤0 for each kkk.
  2. Ck+1≤CkC_{k+1} \le C_kCk+1​≤Ck​, so all iterates lie in L\mathcal LL.
  3. (3.4): f(x)−f(x∗)≤γ∥∇f(x)∥2f(x) - f(x^*) \le \gamma\|\nabla f(x)\|^2f(x)−f(x∗)≤γ∥∇f(x)∥2.
  4. (2.15): Qk+1≤1/(1−ηmax⁡)Q_{k+1} \le 1/(1 - \eta_{\max})Qk+1​≤1/(1−ηmax​).
  5. (3.6): f(xk+1)≤Ck−β∥gk∥2f(x_{k+1}) \le C_k - \beta\|g_k\|^2f(xk+1​)≤Ck​−β∥gk​∥2, with
β=min⁡{δμc1ρ, 2δ(1−δ)c12Lρc22, δ(1−σ)c12Lc22}.\beta = \min\left\{\frac{\delta\mu c_1}{\rho},\ \frac{2\delta(1-\delta)c_1^2}{L\rho c_2^2},\ \frac{\delta(1-\sigma)c_1^2}{Lc_2^2}\right\}.β=min{ρδμc1​​, Lρc22​2δ(1−δ)c12​​, Lc22​δ(1−σ)c12​​}.
  1. (3.7): ∥gk+1∥≤b∥gk∥\|g_{k+1}\| \le b\|g_k\|∥gk+1​∥≤b∥gk​∥, b=1+μc2Lb = 1 + \mu c_2 Lb=1+μc2​L.
  2. (3.8): the explicit contraction
Ck+1−f(x∗)≤θ (Ck−f(x∗)),θ=1−βb2(1−ηmax⁡),b2=1β+γb2.C_{k+1} - f(x^*) \le \theta\,(C_k - f(x^*)),\qquad \theta = 1 - \beta b_2(1-\eta_{\max}),\quad b_2 = \frac{1}{\beta + \gamma b^2}.Ck+1​−f(x∗)≤θ(Ck​−f(x∗)),θ=1−βb2​(1−ηmax​),b2​=β+γb21​.

Here LLL is a Lipschitz constant of ∇f\nabla f∇f on Lˉ\bar{\mathcal L}Lˉ. A further result on the same definitions is Theorem 3.2: if f(xk)f(x_k)f(xk​) converges R-linearly with ratio θ<ηmin⁡\theta < \eta_{\min}θ<ηmin​ inside a compact convex set on which fff is strongly convex, then the sufficient decrease condition with reference value CkC_kCk​ holds for all large kkk.

Significance

Theorem 3.1 shows that averaging past function values costs nothing in the rate: on strongly convex functions the nonmonotone method keeps the linear rate of monotone descent, for any direction sequence satisfying the direction assumption (steepest descent, L-BFGS with bounded condition numbers, and so on). Theorem 3.2 is the converse side: for weights close enough to 1, the averaged test eventually accepts the steps of any R-linearly convergent iteration of this kind. The paper contrasts this with the max-based test of Grippo et al.

These results are proved in the paper. As far as the platform catalogue shows, no line search with the Wolfe conditions or a nonmonotone reference value has been formalized. The only related item is a monotone backtracking gradient descent rate, which is a different theorem. Machine-checked proofs would give reusable Lean statements of the nonmonotone Wolfe and Armijo rules and of the averaged reference value. They would also give the explicit constants β\betaβ, bbb and θ\thetaθ in checked form, and a checked record of the repair of the printed statement described below.

Difficulty

The obvious argument would show that f(xk)−f(x∗)f(x_k) - f(x^*)f(xk​)−f(x∗) contracts at each step. It fails: the method is nonmonotone, and f(xk+1)f(x_{k+1})f(xk+1​) may exceed f(xk)f(x_k)f(xk​). The quantity that contracts is Ck−f(x∗)C_k - f(x^*)Ck​−f(x∗), and only CkC_kCk​ is controlled by the line search. The contraction must be derived by relating ∥gk∥2\|g_k\|^2∥gk​∥2 to Ck−f(x∗)C_k - f(x^*)Ck​−f(x∗) in two regimes, and the second regime needs a bound on f(xk+1)−f(x∗)f(x_{k+1}) - f(x^*)f(xk+1​)−f(x∗) from the gradient at the previous iterate. That bound requires the Lipschitz constant on a region containing every point the line search examines, which is why the region Lˉ\bar{\mathcal L}Lˉ and the step bound μ\muμ enter. In Lean, the sufficient decrease (3.6) also rests on the step-length lower bounds of Lemma 2.1 for both rules, including the integer-exponent Armijo rule with its maximality condition.

Formalization scope

Conventions:

  • The space is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n), fff is ContDiff ℝ 1, and ∇f(x)d\nabla f(x)d∇f(x)d is ⟪gradient f x, d⟫_ℝ.
  • A run is infinite, uses one rule throughout (Wolfe or Armijo), and has arbitrary directions subject to the stated hypotheses.
  • QkQ_kQk​ and CkC_kCk​ are defined by recursion from the run.
  • The Armijo exponent ranges over Z\mathbb{Z}Z and "largest" is IsGreatest.
  • dmax⁡d_{\max}dmax​ and distances are taken in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞], so unbounded directions make Lˉ\bar{\mathcal L}Lˉ the whole space.
  • Strong convexity keeps the paper's constant γ\gammaγ, the inverse modulus.
  • "Lipschitz on bounded sets" means that every bounded set admits a Lipschitz constant for ∇f\nabla f∇f.

Repair of the printed statement: the paper's direction assumption holds only for all sufficiently large kkk, but Theorem 3.1 concludes (3.5) for each kkk, and its proof uses the assumption at every kkk. As printed the theorem is false: d0=0d_0 = 0d0​=0 with the Wolfe step α0=1\alpha_0 = 1α0​=1 gives x1=x0x_1 = x_0x1​=x0​, which violates (3.5) at k=1k = 1k=1 whenever x0≠x∗x_0 \ne x^*x0​=x∗. The goal therefore requires the direction assumption for every k≥0k \ge 0k≥0.

The step bound "there exists μ>0\mu > 0μ>0 with αk≤μ\alpha_k \le \muαk​≤μ" is stated with μ\muμ the algorithm's parameter. For the Armijo rule this holds by construction. The Wolfe rule does not use μ\muμ, so nothing is lost.

Trivializing formalizations are ruled out:

  • the printed hypotheses with "for each kkk" (false, as shown above);
  • a θ\thetaθ allowed to equal 1, or an unspecified constant factor in front of θk\theta^kθk (weaker than (3.5));
  • a globally Lipschitz gradient, or a step bound different from the μ\muμ used to build Lˉ\bar{\mathcal L}Lˉ.

A complete development needs:

  • the NLSA model and Lemma 1.1;
  • the step-length lower bounds of Lemma 2.1 for both rules (via the descent lemma for Lipschitz gradients);
  • the geometric bound on QkQ_kQk​;
  • boundedness of level sets of strongly convex functions.

The NLSA definitions are reusable by any later mission on nonmonotone line searches. Proofs of the milestones in any order are welcome, as are a proof of the counterexample to the printed statement and a proof that the platform theorem ConvexOptimization.strong_convexity_quadratic_lower_bound implies (3.4).

Selected references

  • H. Zhang, W. W. Hager, A Nonmonotone Line Search Technique and Its Application to Unconstrained Optimization, SIAM J. Optim. 14(4):1043–1056, 2004. https://doi.org/10.1137/S1052623403428208
  • L. Grippo, F. Lampariello, S. Lucidi, A Nonmonotone Line Search Technique for Newton's Method, SIAM J. Numer. Anal. 23(4):707–716, 1986. https://doi.org/10.1137/0723046
  • Y.-H. Dai, On the Nonmonotone Line Search, J. Optim. Theory Appl. 112:315–330, 2002 (reference [4] of the paper).
16 thms6 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Analysis·Captain: Lucas

Métodos Numéricos (Freitas) VII: EDOs, Método de Picard e Erro Global de EulerTextbook

Motivation

An initial value problem y′=f(x,y)y' = f(x,y)y′=f(x,y), y(x0)=y0y(x_0) = y_0y(x0​)=y0​, is the standard way a law of motion, a growth model or a circuit equation is written down, and only a small minority of such problems can be integrated in closed form. Single-step methods advance the solution by small increments: Euler's method takes the tangent line at the current point, and the higher-order Runge-Kutta schemes refine the same idea. What justifies them is a pair of theorems: that the problem has a unique solution at all, and that the computed polygon approaches that solution as the step size decreases.

This mission is the seventh in a series formalizing the lecture notes Métodos Numéricos by Sergio Roberto de Freitas (UFMS, 2000). It covers Chapter 9, Métodos Numéricos para EDO's, up to the convergence of Euler's method.

Setting

Consider the initial value problem

y′=f(x,y),qquady(x0)=y0,y' = f(x,y), \\qquad y(x_0) = y_0,y′=f(x,y),qquady(x0​)=y0​,

with fff defined on a rectangle D=[x0−a,x0+a]times[y0−b,y0+b]D = [x_0-a, x_0+a]\\times[y_0-b, y_0+b]D=[x0​−a,x0​+a]times[y0​−b,y0​+b].

Picard's method replaces the differential equation by the integral equation y(x)=y0+intx0xf(t,y(t)),dty(x) = y_0 + \\int_{x_0}^{x} f(t, y(t))\\,dty(x)=y0​+intx0​x​f(t,y(t)),dt and iterates it:

y0(x)=y0,qquadyk+1(x)=y0+intx0xf(t,yk(t)),dt.y_0(x) = y_0, \\qquad y_{k+1}(x) = y_0 + \\int_{x_0}^{x} f(t, y_k(t))\\,dt .y0​(x)=y0​,qquadyk+1​(x)=y0​+intx0​x​f(t,yk​(t)),dt.

With M=maxD∣f∣M = \\max_D |f|M=maxD​∣f∣, N=maxD∣partialf/partialy∣N = \\max_D |\\partial f/\\partial y|N=maxD​∣partialf/partialy∣ and h=mina,b/Mh = \\min\\{a, b/M\\}h=mina,b/M, the source states the bound ∣varphi(x)−yk(x)∣lefracMNk−1k!hk|\\varphi(x) - y_k(x)| \\le \\frac{M N^{k-1}}{k!}h^k∣varphi(x)−yk​(x)∣lefracMNk−1k!hk on [x0−h,x0+h][x_0-h, x_0+h][x0​−h,x0​+h], where varphi\\varphivarphi is the exact solution.

Euler's method with step hhh produces yi+1=yi+hf(xi,yi)y_{i+1} = y_i + h f(x_i, y_i)yi+1​=yi​+hf(xi​,yi​), xi=x0+ihx_i = x_0 + ihxi​=x0​+ih. Its local error is O(h2)O(h^2)O(h2) per step and its global error O(h)O(h)O(h).

Target

The goal theorem is the global error statement: for an initial value problem whose exact solution varphi\\varphivarphi is twice continuously differentiable on [x0,X][x_0, X][x0​,X] and whose right-hand side is Lipschitz in yyy there, there is a constant CCC such that for every step size hin(0,1]h \\in (0,1]hin(0,1] and every grid point x0+ihleXx_0 + ih \\le Xx0​+ihleX,

∣yi−varphi(x0+ih)∣leCh.|y_i - \\varphi(x_0+ih)| \\le C h .∣yi​−varphi(x0​+ih)∣leCh.

This is the precise form of the source's assertion E=O(h)E = O(h)E=O(h).

The milestones are the results the chapter states on the way: local existence and uniqueness for the initial value problem under a Lipschitz condition in yyy (Teorema 9.4.1), the Picard error bound, the convergence of the Picard iterates to the solution, and the one-step Taylor identity behind Euler's method.

Significance

The global error bound is what makes Euler's method a method rather than a heuristic: it converts an arbitrary choice of step size into a guaranteed accuracy, and it exhibits the characteristic loss of one order between the local error O(h2)O(h^2)O(h2) and the global error O(h)O(h)O(h) that recurs for every single-step scheme. The existence and uniqueness theorem is the prerequisite for all of it — without uniqueness there is no well-defined object for the numerical solution to approximate — and the Picard iteration is both the constructive proof of that theorem and a method in its own right.

Difficulty

The global error proof has to handle the interaction of two error sources: the local truncation error at each step and the amplification of previous errors by the Lipschitz constant, which gives the discrete Gronwall recursion ei+1le(1+hL)ei+Ch2e_{i+1} \\le (1+hL)e_i + Ch^2ei+1​le(1+hL)ei​+Ch2. Carrying that recursion to the closed-form bound, and doing it uniformly in hhh, is the core of the mission. The Picard bound requires the iterates to remain inside the rectangle so that the hypotheses on fff continue to apply — that is what the choice h=mina,b/Mh = \\min\\{a, b/M\\}h=mina,b/M is for — and an induction on kkk with the factorial denominator.

Formalization scope

The unknown is a real function of a real variable and fff is a function of two real variables. A solution is a function varphi\\varphivarphi satisfying varphi(x0)=y0\\varphi(x_0)=y_0varphi(x0​)=y0​ and having derivative f(x,varphi(x))f(x,\\varphi(x))f(x,varphi(x)) at every point of the relevant interval. The Lipschitz condition in the second variable is stated explicitly, ∣f(x,u)−f(x,v)∣leL∣u−v∣|f(x,u)-f(x,v)| \\le L|u-v|∣f(x,u)−f(x,v)∣leL∣u−v∣, in place of the source's hypothesis that partialf/partialy\\partial f/\\partial ypartialf/partialy is bounded; for the global-error goal it is assumed for all real u,vu,vu,v and all xxx in the interval, and in the Picard milestones only inside the rectangle. Uniqueness is stated as agreement of any two solutions on the interval, not as uniqueness of a function on all of mathbbR\\mathbb{R}mathbbR, since a solution is unconstrained outside the interval. Euler's iterates and the Picard iterates are explicit recursive definitions; the Picard integral is the interval integral, which is total, so no integrability side condition appears in the definition. The constant CCC in the goal is asserted to exist and to be positive, uniformly over step sizes in (0,1](0,1](0,1]; the restriction hle1h \\le 1hle1 merely normalizes the range of steps considered.

Selected references

  • S. R. Freitas, Métodos Numéricos, Departamento de Computação e Estatística, Universidade Federal de Mato Grosso do Sul, 2000. Chapter 9, Métodos Numéricos para EDO's, pp. 183–213. (Course notes supplied with this mission.)
7 thms5 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Graph TheoryLinear algebra·Captain: mikedeng1

Authoritative Sources in a Hyperlinked Environment: The HITS Hub and Authority Iterates Converge to the Principal Eigenvectors of AᵀA and AAᵀResearch Paper

Motivation

Link-based ranking of web pages rests on a small number of linear-algebraic facts. Kleinberg's HITS algorithm (Hyperlink-Induced Topic Search), introduced in Kleinberg 1999, assigns each page of a hyperlinked collection two scores: an authority score, high for pages that many good hubs point to, and a hub score, high for pages that point to many good authorities. The scores are computed by a simple alternating iteration, and the paper's justification for using them is a convergence theorem: the iteration settles, and its limits are the principal eigenvectors of two symmetric matrices built from the link structure. HITS, together with PageRank (Brin–Page 1998), founded the study of link analysis, and the eigenvector characterization is what later work on the stability and uniqueness of such rankings starts from (for example Ng–Zheng–Jordan 2001 and Farahat et al. 2006).

This mission formalizes that convergence theorem, §3 of the paper, together with the steps of its proof.

Setting

A collection of nnn hyperlinked pages is a directed graph G=(V,E)G=(V,E)G=(V,E) with V={p1,…,pn}V=\{p_1,\dots,p_n\}V={p1​,…,pn​}; an edge (p,q)∈E(p,q)\in E(p,q)∈E means that page ppp links to page qqq. Its adjacency matrix AAA is the n×nn\times nn×n matrix with Aij=1A_{ij}=1Aij​=1 if (pi,pj)∈E(p_i,p_j)\in E(pi​,pj​)∈E and Aij=0A_{ij}=0Aij​=0 otherwise. Self-links are allowed.

Each page ppp carries an authority weight x⟨p⟩x^{\langle p\rangle}x⟨p⟩ and a hub weight y⟨p⟩y^{\langle p\rangle}y⟨p⟩, collected into vectors x,y∈Rnx,y\in\mathbb R^nx,y∈Rn. Two operations update them:

I: x⟨p⟩←∑q:(q,p)∈Ey⟨q⟩,O: y⟨p⟩←∑q:(p,q)∈Ex⟨q⟩.\mathcal I:\ x^{\langle p\rangle}\leftarrow\sum_{q:(q,p)\in E}y^{\langle q\rangle},\qquad \mathcal O:\ y^{\langle p\rangle}\leftarrow\sum_{q:(p,q)\in E}x^{\langle q\rangle}.I: x⟨p⟩←q:(q,p)∈E∑​y⟨q⟩,O: y⟨p⟩←q:(p,q)∈E∑​x⟨q⟩.

Normalizing a vector rescales it so that its squares sum to 111.

The procedure Iterate(G,k)(G,k)(G,k) starts from x0=y0=z=(1,…,1)x_0=y_0=z=(1,\dots,1)x0​=y0​=z=(1,…,1). In round i=1,…,ki=1,\dots,ki=1,…,k it applies I\mathcal II to yi−1y_{i-1}yi−1​, obtaining xi′x_i'xi′​; applies O\mathcal OO to xi′x_i'xi′​, obtaining yi′y_i'yi′​; and normalizes xi′x_i'xi′​ and yi′y_i'yi′​ to get xix_ixi​ and yiy_iyi​. It returns (xk,yk)(x_k,y_k)(xk​,yk​).

For a real symmetric matrix MMM, list its eigenvalues with multiplicity in order of decreasing absolute value, λ1(M),λ2(M),…,λn(M)\lambda_1(M),\lambda_2(M),\dots,\lambda_n(M)λ1​(M),λ2​(M),…,λn​(M). The paper's standing Assumption (†) is

∣λ1(M)∣>∣λ2(M)∣,|\lambda_1(M)|>|\lambda_2(M)|,∣λ1​(M)∣>∣λ2​(M)∣,

so that the eigenspace of λ1(M)\lambda_1(M)λ1​(M) is a line. A principal eigenvector ω1(M)\omega_1(M)ω1​(M) is a unit vector spanning that line; it is determined up to sign.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.2 with the limits of Theorem 3.1

Assume (†) for A⊤AA^{\top}AA⊤A and for AA⊤AA^{\top}AA⊤. Then there are x∗,y∗∈Rnx^*,y^*\in\mathbb R^nx∗,y∗∈Rn with

xk→x∗,yk→y∗,x_k\to x^*,\qquad y_k\to y^*,xk​→x∗,yk​→y∗, A⊤A x∗=λ1(A⊤A) x∗,AA⊤y∗=λ1(AA⊤) y∗,∥x∗∥2=∥y∗∥2=1.A^{\top}A\,x^*=\lambda_1(A^{\top}A)\,x^*,\quad AA^{\top}y^*=\lambda_1(AA^{\top})\,y^*,\quad \|x^*\|_2=\|y^*\|_2=1.A⊤Ax∗=λ1​(A⊤A)x∗,AA⊤y∗=λ1​(AA⊤)y∗,∥x∗∥2​=∥y∗∥2​=1.

The authority scores converge to the principal eigenvector of the co-citation matrix A⊤AA^{\top}AA⊤A, and the hub scores to that of the bibliographic coupling matrix AA⊤AA^{\top}AA⊤.

Milestones: the proof of Theorem 3.1

  1. The operations are linear: I(y)=A⊤y\mathcal I(y)=A^{\top}yI(y)=A⊤y and O(x)=Ax\mathcal O(x)=AxO(x)=Ax.
  2. Closed forms: for k≥1k\ge1k≥1, xkx_kxk​ is the unit vector along (A⊤A)k−1A⊤z(A^{\top}A)^{k-1}A^{\top}z(A⊤A)k−1A⊤z and yky_kyk​ the unit vector along (AA⊤)kz(AA^{\top})^kz(AA⊤)kz.
  3. Normalized power iteration: for symmetric MMM with positive dominant simple eigenvalue and vvv not orthogonal to ω1(M)\omega_1(M)ω1​(M), Mkv/∥Mkv∥M^kv/\|M^kv\|Mkv/∥Mkv∥ converges to a principal eigenvector.
  4. A symmetric matrix with non-negative entries satisfying (†) has a principal eigenvector with non-negative entries.
  5. zzz is not orthogonal to ω1(AA⊤)\omega_1(AA^{\top})ω1​(AA⊤).
  6. If λ1(A⊤A)≠0\lambda_1(A^{\top}A)\ne0λ1​(A⊤A)=0, then A⊤zA^{\top}zA⊤z is not orthogonal to ω1(A⊤A)\omega_1(A^{\top}A)ω1​(A⊤A).
  7. Theorem 3.1: (xk)(x_k)(xk​) and (yk)(y_k)(yk​) converge.

A companion item states Proposition 6.1 (§6): AA⊤AA^{\top}AA⊤ and A⊤AA^{\top}AA⊤A have the same characteristic polynomial, and AAA maps each eigenvector of A⊤AA^{\top}AA⊤A with nonzero eigenvalue to an eigenvector of AA⊤AA^{\top}AA⊤ with the same eigenvalue.

Significance

The theorem turns a heuristic, mutually reinforcing update into a well-defined object: the HITS scores of a graph are the principal eigenvectors of A⊤AA^{\top}AA⊤A and AA⊤AA^{\top}AA⊤, independent of the number of rounds run, and computable by any eigenvector algorithm. It also locates where the definition is fragile: when (†) fails, the limit depends on the starting vector, which is the starting point of the later stability analyses cited above.

The result has been proved since 1999; its proof in the paper is a short appeal to the power method and to a Perron-type non-negativity fact. What this mission adds is a machine-checked version of the whole chain, from the combinatorial update rules on a directed graph to the spectral characterization, with the hypotheses made explicit. Two generic power-method theorems are already proved on the platform (Trefethen–Bau, Lecture 27) and are included as references; to our knowledge no formalization of HITS, of Assumption (†), or of the non-negativity of principal eigenvectors of non-negative symmetric matrices exists in Mathlib or on the platform.

Difficulty

The obvious argument — "the power method converges" — is only half of the proof. The power method converges from a start vector that has a nonzero component along the dominant eigenvector, and the start vectors here are fixed: zzz for the hubs and A⊤zA^{\top}zA⊤z for the authorities. Showing that they are not orthogonal to the principal eigenvectors needs a Perron-type fact (the principal eigenvector of a non-negative symmetric matrix can be chosen non-negative), which in turn needs that the dominant eigenvalue is the spectral radius itself and not its negative. For the authorities the start vector is A⊤zA^{\top}zA⊤z, not zzz, and the argument must also use λ1(A⊤A)≠0\lambda_1(A^{\top}A)\ne0λ1​(A⊤A)=0: when A⊤AA^{\top}AA⊤A has a zero dominant eigenvalue the iterates are 000. A second difficulty is the passage from the rescaled power iterates λ1−kMkv\lambda_1^{-k}M^kvλ1−k​Mkv of the referenced platform theorem to the normalized iterates of the algorithm, and from a statement on an abstract inner product space to one about matrices on Rn\mathbb R^nRn.

Formalization scope

Pages are Fin n; the link relation is a decidable relation E : Fin n → Fin n → Prop; adjMatrix E is the real 0/1 matrix (Mathlib's SimpleGraph.adjMatrix is undirected and loopless and is not used). The operations I\mathcal II, O\mathcal OO are defined as neighbour sums, not as matrix products, so that milestone 1 has content. normalize v divides by the Euclidean norm and sends 000 to 000; no statement is true only because of that convention. hitsIter E k is (xk,yk)(x_k,y_k)(xk​,yk​), with the O\mathcal OO step applied to the unnormalized xk′x_k'xk′​ as on the page. Convergence is in the product topology of Rn\mathbb R^nRn.

Assumption (†) is encoded as Dagger M: an eigenvalue λ1\lambda_1λ1​ with one-dimensional eigenspace, ∣μ∣<∣λ1∣|\mu|<|\lambda_1|∣μ∣<∣λ1​∣ for every other eigenvalue μ\muμ, and λ1≠0\lambda_1\ne0λ1​=0. The last clause is the paper's own reading ("as dictated by Assumption (†)", p. 11); without it, the one-page graph with no link satisfies (†) vacuously and Theorem 3.2 fails. Theorems 3.1 and 3.2 assume (†) for both A⊤AA^{\top}AA⊤A and AA⊤AA^{\top}AA⊤, as the paper does. "The principal eigenvector" is a predicate, IsPrincipalEigenvector, true of both unit vectors in the principal eigenspace. Added hypotheses, each disclosed in its item: λ1>0\lambda_1>0λ1​>0 in the power-iteration milestone (the claim fails for λ1<0\lambda_1<0λ1​<0; it costs nothing for the positive semidefinite A⊤AA^{\top}AA⊤A, AA⊤AA^{\top}AA⊤); the closed form is stated for k≥1k\ge1k≥1. The non-negativity of x∗,y∗x^*,y^*x∗,y∗ is true but not part of Theorem 3.2 and is not asserted.

A formalization in which I\mathcal II and O\mathcal OO are matrix products by definition, or in which Theorem 3.1 alone is the goal (a sequence converging to 000 would satisfy it), is ruled out: the goal pairs convergence with membership of the limit in the principal eigenspace as a unit vector.

Useful infrastructure, reusable beyond this mission: normalized power iteration for real symmetric matrices, and the non-negativity of the principal eigenvector of a non-negative symmetric matrix under a simple dominant eigenvalue. Contributions of either, and of the bridge between Matrix.toLin'-eigenspaces and Matrix.IsHermitian.eigenvalues, are welcome.

Selected references

  • J. M. Kleinberg, Authoritative sources in a hyperlinked environment, Journal of the ACM 46(5):604–632, 1999. https://doi.org/10.1145/324133.324140
  • S. Brin and L. Page, The anatomy of a large-scale hypertextual Web search engine, Computer Networks and ISDN Systems 30:107–117, 1998. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0169-7552(98)00110-X
  • A. Y. Ng, A. X. Zheng and M. I. Jordan, Stable algorithms for link analysis, Proc. SIGIR 2001, 258–266. https://doi.org/10.1145/383952.384003
  • A. Farahat, T. LoFaro, J. C. Miller, G. Rae and L. A. Ward, Authority rankings from HITS, PageRank, and SALSA: existence, uniqueness, and effect of initialization, SIAM J. Sci. Comput. 27(4):1181–1201, 2006. https://doi.org/10.1137/S1064827502412875
  • L. N. Trefethen and D. Bau III, Numerical Linear Algebra, SIAM, 1997, Lecture 27. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9780898719574
11 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Minimization Methods for Non-Differentiable Functions VII: Geometric Convergence of Subgradient Methods with Space Dilation along the GradientTextbook

Motivation

The subgradient method for a nonsmooth convex function converges, but slowly: when the level sets of the objective are elongated, the subgradient is nearly orthogonal to the direction towards the minimum, and the method zigzags. For smooth functions the remedy is a change of metric (Newton and quasi-Newton methods); for nonsmooth functions no Hessian exists to supply one. N. Z. Shor's answer was to learn a metric from the subgradients themselves: after each step, stretch the space along the latest (transformed) subgradient, so that components of future subgradients parallel to it are damped. These subgradient methods with space dilation along the gradient (SDG methods) are the ancestors of Shor's r-algorithm and of the ellipsoid method, which the book (p. 49) describes as a special case of the same family and which Khachiyan later used to show that linear programming is solvable in polynomial time.

Section 3.4 of Shor's monograph (Springer 1985, translated by K. C. Kiwiel and A. Ruszczyński, doi:10.1007/978-3-642-82118-9) proves that, under a two-sided condition on the objective, a suitable SDG method decreases function values at the speed of a geometric progression whose ratio is invariant under nonsingular linear changes of variables. This mission formalizes that chain of results.

Setting

Let EnE_nEn​ be the nnn-dimensional Euclidean space with inner product (x,y)(x,y)(x,y). For a unit vector ξ\xiξ and a coefficient α≥0\alpha \ge 0α≥0, the operator of space dilation along ξ\xiξ is

Rα(ξ) x=x+(α−1)(x,ξ) ξ,R_\alpha(\xi)\,x = x + (\alpha - 1)(x,\xi)\,\xi ,Rα​(ξ)x=x+(α−1)(x,ξ)ξ,

which multiplies the component of xxx along ξ\xiξ by α\alphaα and leaves the orthogonal complement fixed.

Let f:En→Rf : E_n \to \mathbb{R}f:En​→R and let g:En→Eng : E_n \to E_ng:En​→En​ be a generalized gradient: a subgradient of fff when fff is convex, an almost-gradient when fff is almost differentiable. The SDG method starts from x0x_0x0​ and a nonsingular operator B0=A0−1B_0 = A_0^{-1}B0​=A0−1​. At step k=0,1,…k = 0, 1, \dotsk=0,1,…: if g(xk)=0g(x_k) = 0g(xk​)=0 it stops; otherwise it forms the transformed gradient g~k=Bk∗g(xk)\tilde g_k = B_k^* g(x_k)g~​k​=Bk∗​g(xk​), the direction ξk+1=g~k/∥g~k∥\xi_{k+1} = \tilde g_k/\|\tilde g_k\|ξk+1​=g~​k​/∥g~​k​∥, and

xk+1=xk−hk+1Bkξk+1,Bk+1=BkR1/αk+1(ξk+1),Ak+1=Rαk+1(ξk+1)Ak,x_{k+1} = x_k - h_{k+1} B_k \xi_{k+1}, \qquad B_{k+1} = B_k R_{1/\alpha_{k+1}}(\xi_{k+1}), \qquad A_{k+1} = R_{\alpha_{k+1}}(\xi_{k+1}) A_k ,xk+1​=xk​−hk+1​Bk​ξk+1​,Bk+1​=Bk​R1/αk+1​​(ξk+1​),Ak+1​=Rαk+1​​(ξk+1​)Ak​,

with a stepsize hk+1h_{k+1}hk+1​ and a dilation coefficient αk+1\alpha_{k+1}αk+1​. So AkA_kAk​ is the accumulated space transformation, Bk=Ak−1B_k = A_k^{-1}Bk​=Ak−1​, and each step is a subgradient step for φk(y)=f(Bky)\varphi_k(y) = f(B_k y)φk​(y)=f(Bk​y) in the variables y=Akxy = A_k xy=Ak​x.

The quantitative results assume, for a point x∗x^*x∗ and the ball Sd={x:∥x−x∗∥≤d}S_d = \{x : \|x - x^*\| \le d\}Sd​={x:∥x−x∗∥≤d}, the two-sided condition

N [f(x)−f(x∗)]≤(g(x), x−x∗)≤M [f(x)−f(x∗)],x∈Sd,M>N>0.(3.18)N\,[f(x) - f(x^*)] \le (g(x),\, x - x^*) \le M\,[f(x) - f(x^*)], \qquad x \in S_d, \quad M > N > 0. \qquad (3.18)N[f(x)−f(x∗)]≤(g(x),x−x∗)≤M[f(x)−f(x∗)],x∈Sd​,M>N>0.(3.18)

For a convex function the lower inequality holds with N=1N = 1N=1; the upper one bounds how far fff is from a positively homogeneous function around x∗x^*x∗.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.4

Under (3.18), with B0=IB_0 = IB0​=I, x0∈Sdx_0 \in S_dx0​∈Sd​, stepsizes hk+1=2MNM+Nf(xk)−f(x∗)∥g~k∥h_{k+1} = \frac{2MN}{M+N}\frac{f(x_k)-f(x^*)}{\|\tilde g_k\|}hk+1​=M+N2MN​∥g~​k​∥f(xk​)−f(x∗)​, a constant coefficient 1<α≤M+NM−N1 < \alpha \le \frac{M+N}{M-N}1<α≤M−NM+N​, and GGG a bound for ∥g∥\|g\|∥g∥ on SdS_dSd​: there are c>0c > 0c>0 and indices k1<k2<⋯k_1 < k_2 < \cdotsk1​<k2​<⋯ with

f(xkp)−f(x∗)≤c α−kp/n,f(x_{k_p}) - f(x^*) \le c\,\alpha^{-k_p/n},f(xkp​​)−f(x∗)≤cα−kp​/n,

and for every k≥1k \ge 1k≥1

min⁡0≤i≤k−1 [f(xi)−f(x∗)]≤Gk(α2−1) dNα2k/n−1.\min_{0 \le i \le k-1}\,[f(x_i) - f(x^*)] \le \frac{G\sqrt{k(\alpha^2-1)}\,d}{N\sqrt{\alpha^{2k/n}-1}} .0≤i≤k−1min​[f(xi​)−f(x∗)]≤Nα2k/n−1​Gk(α2−1)​d​.

Milestones

  1. Eq. (3.4): ∥Rα(ξ)x∥=∥x∥2+(α2−1)(x,ξ)2\|R_\alpha(\xi)x\| = \sqrt{\|x\|^2 + (\alpha^2-1)(x,\xi)^2}∥Rα​(ξ)x∥=∥x∥2+(α2−1)(x,ξ)2​.
  2. Theorem 3.1: if ∥g(xk)∥≤d\|g(x_k)\| \le d∥g(xk​)∥≤d and 1+δ≤αk≤α∗1+\delta \le \alpha_k \le \alpha^*1+δ≤αk​≤α∗, then ∥g~kp∥<c (∏j≤kpαj)−1/n\|\tilde g_{k_p}\| < c\,(\prod_{j\le k_p}\alpha_j)^{-1/n}∥g~​kp​​∥<c(∏j≤kp​​αj​)−1/n along a subsequence.
  3. Theorem 3.2: for constant α>1\alpha > 1α>1 and B0=IB_0 = IB0​=I, min⁡0≤r≤k−1∥g~r∥≤dk(α2−1)/α2k/n−1\min_{0\le r\le k-1}\|\tilde g_r\| \le d\sqrt{k(\alpha^2-1)}/\sqrt{\alpha^{2k/n}-1}min0≤r≤k−1​∥g~​r​∥≤dk(α2−1)​/α2k/n−1​.
  4. Theorem 3.3: under (3.18) and the rules above, ∥Ak(xk−x∗)∥≤d\|A_k(x_k - x^*)\| \le d∥Ak​(xk​−x∗)∥≤d for all kkk.

Significance

The result shows that one fixed rule, depending only on MMM, NNN and nnn, yields linear convergence of function values for every objective satisfying (3.18), at a ratio α−1/n\alpha^{-1/n}α−1/n that does not deteriorate when the problem is badly scaled: the method, and hence its rate, is invariant under nonsingular linear changes of variables. This is the property the ellipsoid method inherits (Section 3.8 of the book), and the same space-dilation machinery drives the r-algorithm (Section 3.7), still used for large nonsmooth problems such as Lagrangian duals of integer programs.

The theorems are proved in the book; none of them, and no space-dilation method, has a machine-checked proof to our knowledge, and the platform has no statement about variable-metric subgradient methods. The mission provides a reusable formal model of the SDG iteration, the eigenvalue-growth arguments behind Theorems 3.1–3.2, and the one-step invariant of Theorem 3.3. The formalization also corrects two points of the printed text (see Formalization scope).

Difficulty

Theorem 3.3 is a one-step computation, but Theorems 3.1 and 3.2 are not: they relate the size of the transformed gradients to the growth of the singular values of AkA_kAk​, whose determinant is ∏jαj\prod_j \alpha_j∏j​αj​. A bound on ∥g~k∥\|\tilde g_k\|∥g~​k​∥ at a single step says nothing, since the dilations can concentrate in few directions; the argument has to control the largest singular value of AkA_kAk​ over many steps against the geometric-mean lower bound (det⁡Ak)1/n(\det A_k)^{1/n}(detAk​)1/n. The dimension nnn enters the rate exactly through this comparison. Theorem 3.4 then needs the invariant of Theorem 3.3 to keep every iterate inside SdS_dSd​, where (3.18) and the bound GGG are available.

Formalization scope

  • EnE_nEn​ is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n) with n≥1n \ge 1n≥1 in the rate statements. Operators are continuous linear maps; B0B_0B0​ is a continuous linear equivalence and A0A_0A0​ its inverse. The state (xk,Bk,Ak)(x_k, B_k, A_k)(xk​,Bk​,Ak​) is produced by a defined recursion sdg, not assumed; g~k\tilde g_kg~​k​ is gTilde.
  • The stepsize rule receives the index, the current point and g~k\tilde g_kg~​k​; the dilation coefficient at step kkk is α (k+1). When g(xk)=0g(x_k) = 0g(xk​)=0 the state is repeated, which encodes the book's stop; no division by zero is used.
  • The book states Theorems 3.1–3.4 for almost differentiable fff with ggg an almost-gradient; the proofs use only the bounds on ∥g∥\|g\|∥g∥ and (3.18), so the Lean statements quantify over every map ggg with those properties. GGG is any bound for ∥g∥\|g\|∥g∥ on SdS_dSd​ in place of the maximum.
  • Theorems 3.2–3.4 take B0=IB_0 = IB0​=I, as their proofs do; Theorem 3.1 allows any nonsingular B0B_0B0​.
  • Two corrections to the printed statements, both following the proofs: Theorem 3.4's record bound carries the factor 1/N1/N1/N that the proof derives, and the record minima in Theorems 3.2 and 3.4 range over the indices 0,…,k−10, \dots, k-10,…,k−1 that the proof controls, rather than 1,…,k1, \dots, k1,…,k.
  • Constants ccc and subsequences are existential and chosen after the data of the run, before the index ppp. A statement placing ccc after ppp, or dropping (3.18) on SdS_dSd​, would be trivially true or false and is ruled out.

Useful infrastructure, reusable for the r-algorithm and ellipsoid chapters: identities for Rα(ξ)R_\alpha(\xi)Rα​(ξ), determinants and singular values of products of rank-one dilations, and the invariance of the SDG iteration under a linear change of variables. Proofs of any milestone, and alternative arguments for Theorem 3.1, are welcome.

Selected references

  • N. Z. Shor, Minimization Methods for Non-Differentiable Functions, Springer Series in Computational Mathematics 3, Springer, 1985, §§3.2–3.4, pp. 49–62 (translated by K. C. Kiwiel and A. Ruszczyński). https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-642-82118-9
17 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
AnalysisOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

A Nonsmooth Version of Newton's Method II: global convergence of the generalized-Jacobian Newton method on a ball, with an error estimateResearch Paper

Motivation

Many problems in optimization and equilibrium modelling reduce to a system of equations F(x)=0F(x) = 0F(x)=0 with F:Rn→RnF : \mathbb{R}^n \to \mathbb{R}^nF:Rn→Rn that is continuous and locally Lipschitz but not differentiable. Complementarity problems rewritten through the min or Fischer–Burmeister functions, Karush–Kuhn–Tucker systems of nonlinear programs, and the gradients of augmented Lagrangians all have this form. Newton's method xk+1=xk−F′(xk)−1F(xk)x^{k+1} = x^k - F'(x^k)^{-1}F(x^k)xk+1=xk−F′(xk)−1F(xk) cannot be applied verbatim, because F′(xk)F'(x^k)F′(xk) need not exist.

Qi and Sun (Math. Programming 58 (1993) 353–367) replaced the Jacobian by an arbitrary element of Clarke's generalized Jacobian and proved that the resulting method converges under a condition they called semismoothness, extending Mifflin's notion (SIAM J. Control Optim. 15 (1977)) from functionals to maps. The paper has two convergence results. Theorem 3.2 is local: near a semismooth root with nonsingular generalized Jacobian the method converges superlinearly. Theorem 3.3, the target of this mission, is global in the Newton–Kantorovich sense: explicit constants on a ball SSS around the starting point guarantee that the iteration never leaves SSS, that FFF has exactly one zero in SSS, and that the iterates converge to it with a computable error bound. The authors describe it as "an extension of the classical Newton-Kantorovich theorem" (p. 361), which is stated for smooth maps in Ortega and Rheinboldt's monograph.

Timeline.

  • 1948: Kantorovich proves semilocal convergence of Newton's method for smooth operators in Banach spaces.
  • 1975–1983: Clarke introduces the generalized gradient and generalized Jacobian of a locally Lipschitz map (Optimization and Nonsmooth Analysis, Wiley 1983).
  • 1977: Mifflin defines semismooth functionals.
  • 1990: Pang proves convergence of a B-derivative Newton method under a strong Fréchet derivative at the solution.
  • 1993: Qi and Sun (this paper) prove local and global convergence of the generalized-Jacobian Newton method for semismooth maps.

Setting

Work in Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn with the Euclidean norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥; for a linear map VVV, ∥V∥\|V\|∥V∥ is the induced operator norm. Let F:Rn→RnF : \mathbb{R}^n \to \mathbb{R}^nF:Rn→Rn be locally Lipschitz. Write DFD_FDF​ for the set of points where FFF is differentiable and JF(y)JF(y)JF(y) for the derivative at y∈DFy \in D_Fy∈DF​.

  • The generalized Jacobian of FFF at xxx is
∂F(x)=co{lim⁡i→∞JF(xi):xi→x, xi∈DF}.\partial F(x) = \mathrm{co}\Big\{\lim_{i\to\infty} JF(x_i) : x_i \to x,\ x_i \in D_F\Big\}.∂F(x)=co{i→∞lim​JF(xi​):xi​→x, xi​∈DF​}.
  • The directional derivative is F′(x;h)=lim⁡t↓0 (F(x+th)−F(x))/tF'(x;h) = \lim_{t\downarrow 0}\,(F(x+th)-F(x))/tF′(x;h)=limt↓0​(F(x+th)−F(x))/t.
  • FFF is semismooth at xxx if it is Lipschitz near xxx and, for every hhh, Vh′V h'Vh′ has a limit as V∈∂F(x+th′)V \in \partial F(x+th')V∈∂F(x+th′), h′→hh' \to hh′→h, t↓0t \downarrow 0t↓0. Semismoothness implies that F′(x;h)F'(x;h)F′(x;h) exists.
  • A run of the nonsmooth Newton method (3.2) from x0x^0x0 is a pair of sequences (xk)(x^k)(xk), (Vk)(V_k)(Vk​) with Vk∈∂F(xk)V_k \in \partial F(x^k)Vk​∈∂F(xk) and Vk(xk+1−xk)=−F(xk)V_k(x^{k+1} - x^k) = -F(x^k)Vk​(xk+1−xk)=−F(xk) for all kkk; any element of ∂F(xk)\partial F(x^k)∂F(xk) may be chosen.

In Lean these are NonsmoothNewton.Global.clarkeJac, dirDeriv, SemismoothAt and IsNewtonRun, over EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n).

Fix x0x^0x0, r≥0r \ge 0r≥0, the closed ball S={x:∥x−x0∥≤r}S = \{x : \|x - x^0\| \le r\}S={x:∥x−x0∥≤r}, and constants β,γ,δ\beta, \gamma, \deltaβ,γ,δ with α=β(γ+δ)\alpha = \beta(\gamma+\delta)α=β(γ+δ).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.3 (global convergence)

Assume FFF is semismooth at every point of SSS and, for all x,y∈Sx, y \in Sx,y∈S and V∈∂F(x)V \in \partial F(x)V∈∂F(x): VVV is nonsingular,

∥V−1∥≤β,∥V(y−x)−F′(x;y−x)∥≤γ∥y−x∥,∥F(y)−F(x)−F′(x;y−x)∥≤δ∥y−x∥,\|V^{-1}\| \le \beta,\qquad \|V(y-x) - F'(x;y-x)\| \le \gamma\|y-x\|,\qquad \|F(y)-F(x)-F'(x;y-x)\| \le \delta\|y-x\|,∥V−1∥≤β,∥V(y−x)−F′(x;y−x)∥≤γ∥y−x∥,∥F(y)−F(x)−F′(x;y−x)∥≤δ∥y−x∥,

with α<1\alpha < 1α<1 and β∥F(x0)∥≤r(1−α)\beta\|F(x^0)\| \le r(1-\alpha)β∥F(x0)∥≤r(1−α). Then every run of (3.2) from x0x^0x0 stays in SSS, every VkV_kVk​ is nonsingular, FFF has a unique zero x∗x^*x∗ in SSS, xk→x∗x^k \to x^*xk→x∗, and

∥xk−x∗∥≤α1−α ∥xk−xk−1∥,k=1,2,…(3.4)\|x^k - x^*\| \le \frac{\alpha}{1-\alpha}\,\|x^k - x^{k-1}\|,\qquad k = 1, 2, \dots \tag{3.4}∥xk−x∗∥≤1−αα​∥xk−xk−1∥,k=1,2,…(3.4)

Milestones (steps of the proof, p. 360)

  1. The first step: ∥x1−x0∥≤β∥F(x0)∥≤r(1−α)\|x^1 - x^0\| \le \beta\|F(x^0)\| \le r(1-\alpha)∥x1−x0∥≤β∥F(x0)∥≤r(1−α), so x1∈Sx^1 \in Sx1∈S.
  2. One-step contraction: for consecutive Newton points with xk−1,xk∈Sx^{k-1}, x^k \in Sxk−1,xk∈S, ∥xk+1−xk∥≤α∥xk−xk−1∥\|x^{k+1} - x^k\| \le \alpha\|x^k - x^{k-1}\|∥xk+1−xk∥≤α∥xk−xk−1∥.
  3. All iterates remain in SSS, with ∥xk+1−xk∥≤rαk(1−α)\|x^{k+1} - x^k\| \le r\alpha^k(1-\alpha)∥xk+1−xk∥≤rαk(1−α).
  4. A run that stays in SSS and converges has uniformly bounded ∥Vk∥\|V_k\|∥Vk​∥, and its limit is a zero of FFF.
  5. FFF has at most one zero in SSS.

Significance

The theorem certifies, from data checkable on a single ball, that a solution exists, where it is, that it is unique there, and how far the current iterate is from it; (3.4) is an a-posteriori stopping criterion. It holds for every choice of Vk∈∂F(xk)V_k \in \partial F(x^k)Vk​∈∂F(xk), which is what implementations need, since they compute one element of ∂F\partial F∂F and not the whole set. The result underlies the global and semilocal analysis of semismooth Newton methods for complementarity problems, variational inequalities and nonsmooth KKT systems, a line that continued through the 1990s and 2000s.

The theorem is proved on paper; no machine-checked version is known. The platform has no Newton–Kantorovich theorem, smooth or nonsmooth, and no Clarke generalized Jacobian. A complete formalization would supply both, and the definitions layer here (generalized Jacobian, one-sided directional derivative, semismoothness, Newton runs) is shared with the two companion missions on Qi and Sun's local convergence theorem and on semismoothness of augmented Lagrangian gradients.

Difficulty

The Newton map is set-valued: xk+1x^{k+1}xk+1 depends on the choice of VkV_kVk​, so the Banach fixed-point theorem for a single contraction does not apply directly, and the argument must hold for every sequence of choices. The contraction estimate needs both consecutive steps to start inside SSS, so containment in SSS and the geometric decay of the steps must be established together. Identifying the limit as a zero requires a uniform bound on ∥Vk∥\|V_k\|∥Vk​∥, which is not a hypothesis: it has to come from local Lipschitz continuity through the structure of the generalized Jacobian. Uniqueness uses an element V∗∈∂F(x∗)V^* \in \partial F(x^*)V∗∈∂F(x∗), whose existence rests on Rademacher's theorem. Finally, the directional derivative in the hypotheses is only meaningful because semismoothness makes it exist.

Formalization scope

The space is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n), so the norm is Euclidean, as in the paper (p. 356), and ∥V−1∥\|V^{-1}\|∥V−1∥ is the operator norm. Local Lipschitzness is global (LocallyLipschitz F), the standing assumption of Section 3. Conventions:

  • ∂F(x)\partial F(x)∂F(x) is the convex hull of limits of fderiv along sequences in DFD_FDF​; no closure is taken (the limit set is compact for locally Lipschitz FFF).
  • "VVV nonsingular, ∥V−1∥≤β\|V^{-1}\| \le \beta∥V−1∥≤β" is the existence of a two-sided inverse WWW with ∥W∥≤β\|W\| \le \beta∥W∥≤β; Ring.inverse is not used.
  • F′(x;h)F'(x;h)F′(x;h) is dirDeriv, a limUnder along t→0+t \to 0^+t→0+, used only at points of SSS, where semismoothness makes the limit exist.
  • The run is a relation, not a function; every choice of VkV_kVk​ is covered, and nonsingularity of each VkV_kVk​ is a conclusion.
  • The radius condition r≥0r \ge 0r≥0 is an explicit hypothesis. Without it, r<0r < 0r<0 and β<0\beta < 0β<0 would satisfy all other hypotheses vacuously while x0∉Sx^0 \notin Sx0∈/S.
  • The paper's third inequality sits under "for any V∈∂F(x)V \in \partial F(x)V∈∂F(x)"; it is stated without VVV, which is equivalent because ∂F(x)≠∅\partial F(x) \ne \emptyset∂F(x)=∅.
  • (3.4) is stated at index k+1k+1k+1 for k≥0k \ge 0k≥0, avoiding natural-number subtraction.
  • The paper's statements contain no o(⋅)o(\cdot)o(⋅) or O(⋅)O(\cdot)O(⋅); all constants are explicit and fixed before the quantifiers over points of SSS.

The goal is the full four-part conclusion: containment, existence, uniqueness, and convergence with (3.4). A formalization that proves only that the iterates converge to some zero, or that treats ∂F(x)\partial F(x)∂F(x) as possibly empty so that the hypotheses become vacuous, is not the theorem. The hypotheses are satisfiable by genuinely nonsmooth maps, e.g. F(x)=x+110∣x∣−cF(x) = x + \tfrac{1}{10}|x| - cF(x)=x+101​∣x∣−c on R\mathbb{R}R with a ball containing the kink.

A complete development needs: nonemptiness and local boundedness of the generalized Jacobian (Rademacher's theorem, available in Mathlib as LipschitzWith.ae_differentiableAt); geometric-series and Cauchy-sequence arguments in a complete space. The generalized-Jacobian facts are reusable well beyond this mission. Contributions of any of the milestones, or of these general facts as separate lemmas, are welcome.

Selected references

  • L. Qi, J. Sun, A nonsmooth version of Newton's method, Mathematical Programming 58 (1993) 353–367. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01581275
  • F. H. Clarke, Optimization and Nonsmooth Analysis, Wiley, New York, 1983. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9781611971309
  • R. Mifflin, Semismooth and semiconvex functions in constrained optimization, SIAM J. Control Optim. 15 (1977) 959–972. https://doi.org/10.1137/0315061
  • J. M. Ortega, W. C. Rheinboldt, Iterative Solution of Nonlinear Equations in Several Variables, Academic Press, 1970. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9780898719468
  • J.-S. Pang, Newton's method for B-differentiable equations, Mathematics of Operations Research 15 (1990) 311–341. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.15.2.311
11 thms4 active usersReviewed
Complexity TheoryOptimizationQuantum Information·Captain: mikedeng1

Optimizing Quantum Optimization Algorithms via Faster Quantum Gradient Computation: an ε-Accurate Gradient of a Smooth Analytic Function from Õ(c√d/ε · log(d/δ)) Phase-Oracle QueriesResearch Paper

Motivation

Many proposed quantum optimization and machine-learning methods (variational quantum eigensolvers, QAOA, quantum classifiers) tune the real parameters of a circuit by gradient descent on an objective f:Rd→Rf:\mathbb R^d\to\mathbb Rf:Rd→R that is only accessible as a black box. Classically, a finite-difference estimate of ∇f\nabla f∇f costs on the order of ddd evaluations of fff. Quantum algorithms can access fff coherently through a phase oracle Of:∣x⟩↦eif(x)∣x⟩O_f:|x\rangle\mapsto e^{if(x)}|x\rangleOf​:∣x⟩↦eif(x)∣x⟩, and the question is how many such queries are needed to learn ∇f(x)\nabla f(x)∇f(x) to accuracy ε\varepsilonε in the sup norm.

Timeline.

  • 2005: Jordan (Phys. Rev. Lett. 95, 050501) gave an algorithm that reads off the gradient of a nearly affine function from a single oracle call on a uniform superposition over a grid, followed by an inverse quantum Fourier transform. The guarantee requires fff to be very close to affine on the grid.
  • 2017–2019: Gilyén, Arunachalam and Wiebe (arXiv:1711.00465v3; SODA 2019) ran Jordan's algorithm on a high-degree central difference of fff rather than on fff. For functions whose derivatives satisfy a Gevrey-type bound, they obtained O~(cd/ε)\widetilde O(c\sqrt d/\varepsilon)O(cd​/ε) phase queries (Theorem 25), and proved a matching Ω(d/ε)\Omega(\sqrt d/\varepsilon)Ω(d​/ε) lower bound for a class of smooth functions.
  • 2024: Nannicini's lecture notes (arXiv:2408.07086) present Jordan's algorithm in this form. Their Lean formalization on the platform contains the grid, its Fourier transform and the algorithm's state, which this mission reuses.

Setting

A point of Rd\mathbb R^dRd is x=(x1,…,xd)x=(x_1,\dots,x_d)x=(x1​,…,xd​), with ∥x∥∞=max⁡i∣xi∣\|x\|_\infty=\max_i|x_i|∥x∥∞​=maxi​∣xi​∣. The paper's N\mathbb NN is {1,2,… }\{1,2,\dots\}{1,2,…}.

Grid and Jordan's algorithm. For nnn qubits put N=2nN=2^nN=2n. A bit string bbb encoding the integer jjj labels the grid point x(b)=j/N−1/2+1/(2N)x^{(b)}=j/N-1/2+1/(2N)x(b)=j/N−1/2+1/(2N), and GnG_nGn​ is the set of these points (Definition 17). Algorithm 2 prepares ddd registers of nnn qubits in uniform superposition over GndG_n^dGnd​. It applies the phase oracle ∣x⟩↦e2πiNf(x)∣x⟩|x\rangle\mapsto e^{2\pi i N f(x)}|x\rangle∣x⟩↦e2πiNf(x)∣x⟩ once, applies the inverse grid Fourier transform to each register, and measures the outcome (k1,…,kd)∈Gnd(k_1,\dots,k_d)\in G_n^d(k1​,…,kd​)∈Gnd​.

Index sequences and analyticity. For α∈[d]k\alpha\in[d]^kα∈[d]k, ∂αf\partial_\alpha f∂α​f is the kkk-th partial derivative along the coordinates α1,…,αk\alpha_1,\dots,\alpha_kα1​,…,αk​, and yα=∏jyαjy^\alpha=\prod_j y_{\alpha_j}yα=∏j​yαj​​ (Definition 4). The function fff is analytic around xxx if

f(x+y)=∑k=0∞∑α∈[d]kyα ∂αf(x)k!for all y∈Rdf(x+y)=\sum_{k=0}^\infty\sum_{\alpha\in[d]^k}\frac{y^\alpha\,\partial_\alpha f(x)}{k!}\quad\text{for all }y\in\mathbb R^df(x+y)=k=0∑∞​α∈[d]k∑​k!yα∂α​f(x)​for all y∈Rd

(Definition 5, there at x=0x=0x=0).

Central differences. The central difference coefficients are

aℓ(2m)=(−1)ℓ−1ℓ(m∣ℓ∣)(m+∣ℓ∣∣ℓ∣)(0<∣ℓ∣≤m),a0(2m)=0.a_\ell^{(2m)}=\frac{(-1)^{\ell-1}}{\ell}\frac{\binom m{|\ell|}}{\binom{m+|\ell|}{|\ell|}}\quad(0<|\ell|\le m),\qquad a_0^{(2m)}=0.aℓ(2m)​=ℓ(−1)ℓ−1​(∣ℓ∣m+∣ℓ∣​)(∣ℓ∣m​)​(0<∣ℓ∣≤m),a0(2m)​=0.

The degree-2m2m2m central difference of fff is f(2m)(y)=∑ℓ=−mmaℓ(2m)f(ℓy)f_{(2m)}(y)=\sum_{\ell=-m}^m a_\ell^{(2m)}f(\ell y)f(2m)​(y)=∑ℓ=−mm​aℓ(2m)​f(ℓy), an approximation of ∇f(0)⋅y\nabla f(0)\cdot y∇f(0)⋅y (Definition 7).

Queries. A fractional query Ofs:∣x⟩↦eisf(x)∣x⟩O_f^s:|x\rangle\mapsto e^{isf(x)}|x\rangleOfs​:∣x⟩↦eisf(x)∣x⟩ with ∣s∣≤1|s|\le1∣s∣≤1 counts as one query (Definitions 10–11). The algorithm of Theorem 25 has parameters m,nε,nM,Tm,n_\varepsilon,n_M,Tm,nε​,nM​,T and r>0r>0r>0. It runs Algorithm 2 with n=nε+nMn=n_\varepsilon+n_Mn=nε​+nM​ qubits per register on the phase 2π 2nεg(2m)(rz)2\pi\,2^{n_\varepsilon} g_{(2m)}(rz)2π2nε​g(2m)​(rz), where g(y)=f(x+y)g(y)=f(x+y)g(y)=f(x+y). It reads each outcome kkk as (2nM/r) k(2^{n_M}/r)\,k(2nM​/r)k, repeats TTT times and outputs the coordinate-wise median. One run costs ∑ℓ⌈2π2nε∣aℓ(2m)∣⌉\sum_\ell\lceil 2\pi 2^{n_\varepsilon}|a^{(2m)}_\ell|\rceil∑ℓ​⌈2π2nε​∣aℓ(2m)​∣⌉ queries to OfO_fOf​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 25

There is an absolute constant CCC such that for every d≥1d\ge1d≥1, 0<ε≤c0<\varepsilon\le c0<ε≤c and δ>0\delta>0δ>0 some parameter choice, made before xxx and fff, uses at most

C cdε log⁡(2+cdε)log⁡(2+log⁡(2+cdε))log⁡(2+dδ)C\,\frac{c\sqrt d}{\varepsilon}\,\log\Big(2+\frac{c\sqrt d}{\varepsilon}\Big)\log\Big(2+\log\Big(2+\frac{c\sqrt d}{\varepsilon}\Big)\Big)\log\Big(2+\frac d\delta\Big)Cεcd​​log(2+εcd​​)log(2+log(2+εcd​​))log(2+δd​)

queries. For every xxx and every smooth fff that is analytic around xxx with ∣∂αf(x)∣≤ckkk/2|\partial_\alpha f(x)|\le c^k k^{k/2}∣∂α​f(x)∣≤ckkk/2 (k≥1k\ge1k≥1), it outputs ∇~f(x)\tilde\nabla f(x)∇~f(x) with ∥∇f(x)−∇~f(x)∥∞≤ε\|\nabla f(x)-\tilde\nabla f(x)\|_\infty\le\varepsilon∥∇f(x)−∇~f(x)∥∞​≤ε with probability at least 1−δ1-\delta1−δ.

Milestones

  • Lemma 34, ∑ℓ∣aℓ(2m)ℓk+1∣≤6e−7m/6mk+3/2\sum_\ell|a^{(2m)}_\ell\ell^{k+1}|\le6e^{-7m/6}m^{k+3/2}∑ℓ​∣aℓ(2m)​ℓk+1∣≤6e−7m/6mk+3/2 for k≥2mk\ge2mk≥2m.
  • Lemma 22: (23), ∣f′(0)δ−f(2m)(δ)∣≤e−m/2∥f(2m+1)∥∞∣δ∣2m+1|f'(0)\delta-f_{(2m)}(\delta)|\le e^{-m/2}\|f^{(2m+1)}\|_\infty|\delta|^{2m+1}∣f′(0)δ−f(2m)​(δ)∣≤e−m/2∥f(2m+1)∥∞​∣δ∣2m+1; and (24), ∑ℓ=0m∣aℓ(2m)∣<∑ℓ=1m1/ℓ≤ln⁡m+1\sum_{\ell=0}^m|a_\ell^{(2m)}|<\sum_{\ell=1}^m 1/\ell\le\ln m+1∑ℓ=0m​∣aℓ(2m)​∣<∑ℓ=1m​1/ℓ≤lnm+1.
  • The moment identity (proof of Theorem 24): ∑ℓ=−mmaℓ(2m)ℓk\sum_{\ell=-m}^m a_\ell^{(2m)}\ell^k∑ℓ=−mm​aℓ(2m)​ℓk is 111 for k=1k=1k=1 and 000 for the other k≤2mk\le2mk≤2m.
  • Lemma 36, a tail bound P[∣∑αHαxα∣≥2(rdk/2)k]≤r−2k\mathbb P[|\sum_\alpha H_\alpha x^\alpha|\ge\sqrt2(r\sqrt{dk/2})^k]\le r^{-2k}P[∣∑α​Hα​xα∣≥2​(rdk/2​)k]≤r−2k for i.i.d. symmetric xi∈[−1/2,1/2]x_i\in[-1/2,1/2]xi​∈[−1/2,1/2].
  • Theorem 24: ∣∇f(0)y−f(2m)(y)∣≤∑k≥2m+1(8Rcmd)k|\nabla f(0)y-f_{(2m)}(y)|\le\sum_{k\ge2m+1}(8Rcm\sqrt d)^k∣∇f(0)y−f(2m)​(y)∣≤∑k≥2m+1​(8Rcmd​)k for all but a 1/10001/10001/1000 fraction of y∈R⋅Gndy\in R\cdot G_n^dy∈R⋅Gnd​.
  • The choice of rrr (proof of Theorem 25): with r−1=9cmd (81⋅8⋅42πcmd/ε)1/(2m)r^{-1}=9cm\sqrt d\,(81\cdot8\cdot42\pi cm\sqrt d/\varepsilon)^{1/(2m)}r−1=9cmd​(81⋅8⋅42πcmd​/ε)1/(2m),
∑k=2m+1∞(8rcmd)k≤εr8⋅42π.\sum_{k=2m+1}^\infty(8rcm\sqrt d)^k\le\frac{\varepsilon r}{8\cdot42\pi}.k=2m+1∑∞​(8rcmd​)k≤8⋅42πεr​.
  • Lemma 20: if ∣f(x)−g⋅x−c∣≤1/(42πN)|f(x)-g\cdot x-c|\le1/(42\pi N)∣f(x)−g⋅x−c∣≤1/(42πN) off a 1/10001/10001/1000 fraction of GndG_n^dGnd​ and ∥g∥∞≤1/3\|g\|_\infty\le1/3∥g∥∞​≤1/3, then Pr⁡[∣ki−gi∣>4/N]≤1/3\Pr[|k_i-g_i|>4/N]\le1/3Pr[∣ki​−gi​∣>4/N]≤1/3.
  • Theorem 21 (query part): O(log⁡(d/ρ))O(\log(d/\rho))O(log(d/ρ)) runs and a median give Pr⁡[∥g~−g∥∞>ε]≤ρ\Pr[\|\tilde g-g\|_\infty>\varepsilon]\le\rhoPr[∥g~​−g∥∞​>ε]≤ρ.
  • Display (25): ∑ℓ⌈∣aℓ(2m)∣S⌉≤2m+S(2log⁡m+2)\sum_\ell\lceil|a^{(2m)}_\ell|S\rceil\le2m+S(2\log m+2)∑ℓ​⌈∣aℓ(2m)​∣S⌉≤2m+S(2logm+2). The page prints the middle term S∑ℓaℓ(2m)S\sum_\ell a^{(2m)}_\ellS∑ℓ​aℓ(2m)​ without absolute values; the formal statement uses ∣aℓ(2m)∣|a^{(2m)}_\ell|∣aℓ(2m)​∣.

Significance

The result. Theorem 25 gives a quantum gradient algorithm whose query count grows like d\sqrt dd​ in the dimension and nearly linearly in 1/ε1/\varepsilon1/ε. Jordan's original analysis gives d/ε2\sqrt d/\varepsilon^2d​/ε2, and classical finite differences need on the order of ddd evaluations. Section 6 of the paper shows that d/ε\sqrt d/\varepsilond​/ε cannot be beaten for a class of smooth functions, so Theorem 25 is optimal up to logarithmic factors. Section 5.5 shows that probability oracles built from parametrized circuits satisfy the derivative bound, so the theorem applies to gradient-based training of variational circuits.

Formalizing it. The theorems are proved in the paper; this mission is not aware of a machine-checked proof of any of them. A formal proof would check the explicit constants (1/1000, 42π42\pi42π, 8Rcmd8Rcm\sqrt d8Rcmd​, 6e−7m/66e^{-7m/6}6e−7m/6) and the accounting of fractional queries, which are spread across the main text and Appendix A. It would also produce reusable libraries: exactness and coefficient bounds for central differences, concentration of random multilinear forms, and a phase-estimation-style analysis of Jordan's algorithm on the published Lean model.

Difficulty

Jordan's algorithm reads off a gradient only if the phase is almost exactly affine on the whole grid. A truncated Taylor expansion of fff makes the error of order-kkk terms grow like dkd^{k}dk on the cube, which destroys the d\sqrt dd​ scaling. The approximation is only good on most of the grid, not all of it. The guarantee therefore has to tolerate a small fraction of bad grid points inside the quantum algorithm (Lemma 20) and has to control random multilinear forms (Lemma 36). The analysis also has to keep explicit, mmm-uniform control of the central difference coefficients, whose sizes enter both the approximation error and the query count.

Formalization scope

  • Representation. Rd\mathbb R^dRd is Fin d → ℝ, whose norm is ∥⋅∥∞\|\cdot\|_\infty∥⋅∥∞​. ∂αf\partial_\alpha f∂α​f is iteratedFDeriv along coordinate vectors, and functions are assumed C∞C^\inftyC∞ (ContDiff ℝ ((⊤ : ℕ∞) : WithTop ℕ∞)). "Analytic" is the Taylor representation (5) at the relevant point (IsTaylorRep), not Mathlib's local AnalyticAt.
  • Fractions and probabilities. "All but a 1/10001/10001/1000 fraction of GndG_n^dGnd​" means the number of bad grid labels is at most Nd/1000N^d/1000Nd/1000. Probabilities are those of the published Algorithm 2 state QAlgorithms.gradientAlgState. Independent runs multiply.
  • Indices and constants. N\mathbb NN starts at 111: derivative bounds are for k≥1k\ge1k≥1, and m≥1m\ge1m≥1. O(⋅)O(\cdot)O(⋅) and O~(⋅)\widetilde O(\cdot)O(⋅) are absolute constants quantified before every parameter, with the polylog factor of display (26) written out.
  • Added hypotheses.
    • Theorem 24 assumes 8Rcmd<18Rcm\sqrt d<18Rcmd​<1, the condition under which its printed series is finite.
    • Lemma 22 uses a bound BBB on ∣f(2m+1)∣|f^{(2m+1)}|∣f(2m+1)∣ in place of the supremum.
    • Theorem 21 requires its register size n=nε+nMn=n_\varepsilon+n_Mn=nε​+nM​ to be a natural number.
  • Query count. The count is a definition: T∑ℓ⌈2π2nε∣aℓ(2m)∣⌉T\sum_\ell\lceil2\pi2^{n_\varepsilon}|a_\ell^{(2m)}|\rceilT∑ℓ​⌈2π2nε​∣aℓ(2m)​∣⌉.
  • Not formalized. Gate complexity (no circuit model), the probability-to-phase oracle conversions, the lower bounds and Theorem 23.
  • Ruled out. None of the following counts as Theorem 25: a goal with an existential over arbitrary functions of fff (which could output ∇f(x)\nabla f(x)∇f(x) with no queries), a query count not tied to the algorithm that is run, or a statement for one fixed ddd.

Contributions are welcome at every level. Most useful are general facts about central difference coefficients (moment identities, ∑∣aℓ∣\sum|a_\ell|∑∣aℓ​∣, the binomial ratio bounds), concentration of multilinear forms in independent symmetric variables, and the single-run analysis of gradientAlgState. These are reusable beyond this mission.

Selected references

  • A. Gilyén, S. Arunachalam, N. Wiebe, Optimizing quantum optimization algorithms via faster quantum gradient computation, arXiv:1711.00465v3 (2018); Proceedings of SODA 2019. https://arxiv.org/abs/1711.00465
  • S. P. Jordan, Fast quantum algorithm for numerical gradient estimation, Physical Review Letters 95(5):050501, 2005. https://arxiv.org/abs/quant-ph/0405146
  • J. Li, General explicit difference formulas for numerical differentiation, Journal of Computational and Applied Mathematics 183(1):29–52, 2005.
  • G. Nannicini, Quantum algorithms for optimizers, arXiv:2408.07086, 2024. https://arxiv.org/abs/2408.07086
  • M. A. Nielsen, I. L. Chuang, Quantum Computation and Quantum Information, Cambridge University Press, 2002 (phase estimation, §5.2).
14 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

From Differential Equation Solvers to Accelerated First-Order Methods for Convex Optimization 6: Nesterov's Method Has ℒ_k ≤ ℒ₀·min{4L/(√γ₀k + 2√L)², (1 − √(min{γ₁, μ}/L))^k}Research Paper

Motivation

Nesterov's accelerated gradient method minimises a smooth convex function fff to accuracy ε\varepsilonε in O(L/ε)O(\sqrt{L/\varepsilon})O(L/ε​) gradient evaluations, and a μ\muμ-strongly convex one in O(L/μ log⁡(1/ε))O(\sqrt{L/\mu}\,\log(1/\varepsilon))O(L/μ​log(1/ε)); both counts match the lower bounds for first-order methods. Nesterov's own analysis (Y. Nesterov, Introductory Lectures on Convex Optimization, 2004, Ch. 2) proceeds by estimate sequences, an algebraic device that certifies the rate but says little about where the method comes from. Since Su, Boyd and Candès (arXiv:1503.01243), accelerated methods have been read as discretisations of ordinary differential equations, with convergence proved by discrete Lyapunov functions.

H. Luo and L. Chen, From differential equation solvers to accelerated first-order methods for convex optimization (arXiv:1909.03145, Math. Program. 2022), introduce the NAG flow, a first-order system in a position xxx, an auxiliary variable vvv and a scaling parameter γ\gammaγ whose Lyapunov function decays exponentially for every μ≥0\mu\ge0μ≥0. In §6 they show that Nesterov's general scheme of optimal method (Algorithm 1) is itself a corrected semi-implicit discretisation of this flow, and they reprove its rates with one Lyapunov function that covers μ=0\mu=0μ=0 and μ>0\mu>0μ>0 at once. This mission formalises that analysis, Theorem 6.1.

Setting

Let VVV be a real Hilbert space with inner product ⟨⋅,⋅⟩\langle\cdot,\cdot\rangle⟨⋅,⋅⟩ and norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥. A function f:V→Rf:V\to\mathbb Rf:V→R with gradient map ∇f\nabla f∇f belongs to Sμ1\mathcal S^1_\muSμ1​ (μ≥0\mu\ge0μ≥0) if it is continuously differentiable and μ\muμ-convex,

f(x)−f(y)−⟨∇f(y),x−y⟩≥μ2∥x−y∥2∀x,y∈V,f(x)-f(y)-\langle\nabla f(y),x-y\rangle\ge\tfrac{\mu}{2}\|x-y\|^2\qquad\forall x,y\in V,f(x)−f(y)−⟨∇f(y),x−y⟩≥2μ​∥x−y∥2∀x,y∈V,

and to Sμ,L1,1\mathcal S^{1,1}_{\mu,L}Sμ,L1,1​ if moreover ∇f\nabla f∇f is LLL-Lipschitz, with 0≤μ≤L<∞0\le\mu\le L<\infty0≤μ≤L<∞. A point x∗x^*x∗ minimises fff globally.

Algorithm 1 (Nesterov accelerated gradient method) takes x0,v0∈Vx_0,v_0\in Vx0​,v0​∈V and γ0>0\gamma_0>0γ0​>0. For k=0,1,…k=0,1,\dotsk=0,1,… it computes the positive root αk\alpha_kαk​ of Lαk2=(1−αk)γk+μαkL\alpha_k^2=(1-\alpha_k)\gamma_k+\mu\alpha_kLαk2​=(1−αk​)γk​+μαk​, sets γk+1=(1−αk)γk+μαk\gamma_{k+1}=(1-\alpha_k)\gamma_k+\mu\alpha_kγk+1​=(1−αk​)γk​+μαk​ and

yk=αkγkvk+γk+1xkγk+μαk,y_k=\frac{\alpha_k\gamma_kv_k+\gamma_{k+1}x_k}{\gamma_k+\mu\alpha_k},yk​=γk​+μαk​αk​γk​vk​+γk+1​xk​​,

chooses any xk+1x_{k+1}xk+1​ with the sufficient decrease f(xk+1)≤f(yk)−12L∥∇f(yk)∥2f(x_{k+1})\le f(y_k)-\frac1{2L}\|\nabla f(y_k)\|^2f(xk+1​)≤f(yk​)−2L1​∥∇f(yk​)∥2 (for instance the gradient step xk+1=yk−1L∇f(yk)x_{k+1}=y_k-\frac1L\nabla f(y_k)xk+1​=yk​−L1​∇f(yk​)), and sets

vk+1=1γk+1[(1−αk)γkvk+αk(μyk−∇f(yk))].v_{k+1}=\frac{1}{\gamma_{k+1}}\big[(1-\alpha_k)\gamma_kv_k+\alpha_k(\mu y_k-\nabla f(y_k))\big].vk+1​=γk+1​1​[(1−αk​)γk​vk​+αk​(μyk​−∇f(yk​))].

The Lyapunov function is

Lk=f(xk)−f(x∗)+γk2∥vk−x∗∥2,(74)\mathcal L_k=f(x_k)-f(x^*)+\frac{\gamma_k}{2}\|v_k-x^*\|^2,\tag{74}Lk​=f(xk​)−f(x∗)+2γk​​∥vk​−x∗∥2,(74)

and Cγ0,L=Lγ0(f(x0)−f(x∗))+L2∥v0−x∗∥2C_{\gamma_0,L}=\frac{L}{\gamma_0}(f(x_0)-f(x^*))+\frac L2\|v_0-x^*\|^2Cγ0​,L​=γ0​L​(f(x0​)−f(x∗))+2L​∥v0​−x∗∥2 (89).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 6.1

For f∈Sμ,L1,1f\in\mathcal S^{1,1}_{\mu,L}f∈Sμ,L1,1​, every run of Algorithm 1 has 0<αk≤10<\alpha_k\le10<αk​≤1 and

Lk+1≤(1−αk)Lk(k∈N),(98)\mathcal L_{k+1}\le(1-\alpha_k)\mathcal L_k\quad(k\in\mathbb N),\tag{98}Lk+1​≤(1−αk​)Lk​(k∈N),(98) Lk≤L0min⁡{4L(γ0 k+2L)2,(1−min⁡{γ1,μ}L)k}(k≥0),(99)\mathcal L_k\le\mathcal L_0\min\left\{\frac{4L}{(\sqrt{\gamma_0}\,k+2\sqrt L)^2},\Big(1-\sqrt{\tfrac{\min\{\gamma_1,\mu\}}{L}}\Big)^{k}\right\}\quad(k\ge0),\tag{99}Lk​≤L0​min{(γ0​​k+2L​)24L​,(1−Lmin{γ1​,μ}​​)k}(k≥0),(99) Lk≤Cγ0,Lmin⁡{4k2,(1−min⁡{γ1,μ}L)k−1}(k≥1).(100)\mathcal L_k\le C_{\gamma_0,L}\min\left\{\frac{4}{k^2},\Big(1-\sqrt{\tfrac{\min\{\gamma_1,\mu\}}{L}}\Big)^{k-1}\right\}\quad(k\ge1).\tag{100}Lk​≤Cγ0​,L​min{k24​,(1−Lmin{γ1​,μ}​​)k−1}(k≥1).(100)

All four conclusions are part of the goal: (98) alone does not carry a rate.

Milestones

  1. The equivalent form (96)–(97) (p. 24): Algorithm 1 is the scheme γk+1−γkαk=μ−γk\frac{\gamma_{k+1}-\gamma_k}{\alpha_k}=\mu-\gamma_kαk​γk+1​−γk​​=μ−γk​, yk−xkαk=γkγk+1(vk−yk)\frac{y_k-x_k}{\alpha_k}=\frac{\gamma_k}{\gamma_{k+1}}(v_k-y_k)αk​yk​−xk​​=γk+1​γk​​(vk​−yk​), vk+1−vkαk=μγk+1(yk−vk)−1γk+1∇f(yk)\frac{v_{k+1}-v_k}{\alpha_k}=\frac{\mu}{\gamma_{k+1}}(y_k-v_k)-\frac1{\gamma_{k+1}}\nabla f(y_k)αk​vk+1​−vk​​=γk+1​μ​(yk​−vk​)−γk+1​1​∇f(yk​) with the decrease step (97) and Lαk2=γk+1L\alpha_k^2=\gamma_{k+1}Lαk2​=γk+1​.
  2. The formulas for vkv_kvk​ and vk+1v_{k+1}vk+1​ in terms of yky_kyk​, xkx_kxk​, ∇f(yk)\nabla f(y_k)∇f(yk​) (p. 24).
  3. The direct-computation identity for γk+12∥vk+1−x∗∥2−γk2(1−αk)∥vk−x∗∥2\frac{\gamma_{k+1}}2\|v_{k+1}-x^*\|^2-\frac{\gamma_k}2(1-\alpha_k)\|v_k-x^*\|^22γk+1​​∥vk+1​−x∗∥2−2γk​​(1−αk​)∥vk​−x∗∥2 (p. 24).
  4. Its μ\muμ-convexity bound (p. 25).
  5. The one-step bound Lk+1−(1−αk)Lk≤f(xk+1)−f(yk)+αk22γk+1∥∇f(yk)∥2\mathcal L_{k+1}-(1-\alpha_k)\mathcal L_k\le f(x_{k+1})-f(y_k)+\frac{\alpha_k^2}{2\gamma_{k+1}}\|\nabla f(y_k)\|^2Lk+1​−(1−αk​)Lk​≤f(xk+1​)−f(yk​)+2γk+1​αk2​​∥∇f(yk​)∥2 (p. 25).
  6. Lemma B.1 (p. 37): for Lkαk2=γk+1L_k\alpha_k^2=\gamma_{k+1}Lk​αk2​=γk+1​, γk+1=(1−αk)γk+μαk\gamma_{k+1}=(1-\alpha_k)\gamma_k+\mu\alpha_kγk+1​=(1−αk​)γk​+μαk​, positivity, αk≤1\alpha_k\le1αk​≤1, αk≥min⁡{γ1,μ}/L\alpha_k\ge\sqrt{\min\{\gamma_1,\mu\}/L}αk​≥min{γ1​,μ}/L​, and the bounds (129)–(130) on ∏i<k(1−αi)\prod_{i<k}(1-\alpha_i)∏i<k​(1−αi​).

A companion item states (103) of Remark 6.3 for Algorithm 1: with μ=0\mu=0μ=0, γ0=L\gamma_0=Lγ0​=L, v0=x0v_0=x_0v0​=x0​, f(xk)−f(x∗)≤4Lk2∥x0−x∗∥2f(x_k)-f(x^*)\le\frac{4L}{k^2}\|x_0-x^*\|^2f(xk​)−f(x∗)≤k24L​∥x0​−x∗∥2.

Significance

Theorem 6.1 recovers, by a Lyapunov argument, the optimal rates of Nesterov's method in both regimes: O(L/(γ0k2))O(L/(\gamma_0k^2))O(L/(γ0​k2)) for convex fff and (1−μ/L)k(1-\sqrt{\mu/L})^k(1−μ/L​)k for strongly convex fff once γ1≥μ\gamma_1\ge\muγ1​≥μ, with the parameter γk\gamma_kγk​ moving between them automatically. It covers every sufficient-decrease choice of xk+1x_{k+1}xk+1​, not only the gradient step, and it places Nesterov's method in the same family as the predictor–corrector and gradient-corrected schemes of §5, whose analyses share the Lyapunov function (74) and the rate lemmas of Appendix B. Comparing (99) with the rate (1+μ/L)−k(1+\sqrt{\mu/L})^{-k}(1+μ/L​)−k of those schemes shows that Nesterov's method is slightly faster per step, with the same complexity.

The result is proved in the paper; the proof of (100) is omitted as similar to that of (88). Nesterov's rates for related parameterisations have been stated on this platform (Bubeck's monograph, Theorems 3.18–3.19), but not for Algorithm 1 with the adaptive parameter γk\gamma_kγk​, and no machine-checked proof of Theorem 6.1 or Lemma B.1 is known. A formalisation checks the omitted step, pins down where αk≤1\alpha_k\le1αk​≤1 is used, and adds a discrete Lyapunov toolkit for accelerated methods in Hilbert space.

Difficulty

Reading Algorithm 1 directly gives a three-sequence recursion with no visible monotone quantity: f(xk)f(x_k)f(xk​) itself need not decrease. The contraction (98) holds only for the specific combination (74), and only after the cross terms in ∇f(yk)\nabla f(y_k)∇f(yk​) produced by the vvv-update are matched exactly against the sufficient-decrease step; any slack in the step rule Lαk2=γk+1L\alpha_k^2=\gamma_{k+1}Lαk2​=γk+1​ leaves a positive gradient term. A second difficulty is uniformity in μ\muμ: when μ=0\mu=0μ=0 the linear factor 1−min⁡{γ1,μ}/L1-\sqrt{\min\{\gamma_1,\mu\}/L}1−min{γ1​,μ}/L​ equals 111, so the O(1/k2)O(1/k^2)O(1/k2) rate must come from a separate estimate of ∏i<k(1−αi)\prod_{i<k}(1-\alpha_i)∏i<k​(1−αi​) in terms of the step sizes, which are defined only implicitly by a quadratic equation.

Formalization scope

  • VVV is a real Hilbert space (NormedAddCommGroup, InnerProductSpace ℝ, CompleteSpace); the paper's duality pairing and dual norm are the inner product and the norm (Riesz identification).
  • The gradient is an explicit map gradf : V → V with HasGradientAt f (gradf x) x at every point; Mathlib's gradient is not used.
  • The classes are structures IsS1 and IsS11; Sμ,L1,1\mathcal S^{1,1}_{\mu,L}Sμ,L1,1​ includes 0<L0<L0<L and μ≤L\mu\le Lμ≤L, and the upper bound (4) is a consequence, not an assumption.
  • A run of Algorithm 1 is a structure IsNAGRun of hypotheses on given sequences, one per step. Step 2 records only αk>0\alpha_k>0αk​>0 (the page writes αk∈(0,1)\alpha_k\in(0,1)αk​∈(0,1), but αk=1\alpha_k=1αk​=1 occurs when μ=L\mu=Lμ=L, and αk≤1\alpha_k\le1αk​≤1 is a conclusion of the theorem). Step 5 is an inequality, not the gradient step. The step sizes are not replaced by a closed form.
  • x∗x^*x∗ is a global minimiser of fff (the paper's standing assumption, p. 2); γ1\gamma_1γ1​ is the value produced by the run.
  • Indices start at 000; (1−s)k(1-s)^k(1−s)k and (1−s)k−1(1-s)^{k-1}(1−s)k−1 are natural powers, with (100) stated for k≥1k\ge1k≥1; (99) is stated for all k≥0k\ge0k≥0.
  • Milestones 2 and 3 are stated for one step of (96) with αk,γk,γk+1>0\alpha_k,\gamma_k,\gamma_{k+1}>0αk​,γk​,γk+1​>0; milestones 4 and 5 along runs of Algorithm 1 under the hypotheses of Theorem 6.1.
  • In Lemma B.1, L:=sup⁡kLkL:=\sup_kL_kL:=supk​Lk​ is replaced by an arbitrary real upper bound LLL; the conclusions involving LLL weaken as LLL grows, so this is equivalent when the supremum is finite.

A statement that assumes the contraction (98) for arbitrary sequences, or fixes xk+1x_{k+1}xk+1​ to the gradient step, or states only (98), would not be Theorem 6.1 and is ruled out: the goal quantifies over all runs of Algorithm 1 and states all four conclusions.

Contributions welcome: proofs of Lemma B.1 (a self-contained statement about real sequences), the algebraic milestones 1–3, and the convexity steps 4–5. The definitions are local to this mission and duplicate those of the other missions of the series, to be merged later.

Selected references

  • H. Luo, L. Chen, From differential equation solvers to accelerated first-order methods for convex optimization, Math. Program. 195 (2022); arXiv:1909.03145v4. https://arxiv.org/abs/1909.03145
  • Y. Nesterov, Introductory Lectures on Convex Optimization: A Basic Course, Kluwer, 2004. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4419-8853-9
  • W. Su, S. Boyd, E. J. Candès, A differential equation for modeling Nesterov's accelerated gradient method: theory and insights, J. Mach. Learn. Res. 17 (2016); arXiv:1503.01243. https://arxiv.org/abs/1503.01243
  • S. Bubeck, Convex Optimization: Algorithms and Complexity, Found. Trends Mach. Learn. 8 (2015); arXiv:1405.4980. https://arxiv.org/abs/1405.4980
9 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

From Differential Equation Solvers to Accelerated First-Order Methods for Convex Optimization 4: The Predictor–Corrector Scheme Has ℒ_k ≤ ℒ₀·min{4L/(√γ₀k + 2√L)², (1 + √(min{γ₀, μ}/L))^(−k)}Research Paper

Motivation

Nesterov's accelerated gradient method minimises a smooth convex function fff to accuracy ε\varepsilonε in O(1/ε)O(1/\sqrt{\varepsilon})O(1/ε​) gradient evaluations, and a μ\muμ-strongly convex one in O(L/μlog⁡(1/ε))O(\sqrt{L/\mu}\log(1/\varepsilon))O(L/μ​log(1/ε)), which is optimal for first-order methods. The method's original derivation by estimate sequences gives little insight into why it accelerates. Since Su, Boyd and Candès (arXiv:1503.01243) a large literature reads accelerated methods as discretisations of second-order ordinary differential equations and proves their rates with Lyapunov functions transported from the continuous to the discrete setting.

H. Luo and L. Chen, From differential equation solvers to accelerated first-order methods for convex optimization (arXiv:1909.03145, Math. Program. 2022), introduce the NAG flow, a first-order system in a position variable xxx, a velocity-like variable vvv and a scaling parameter γ\gammaγ, whose Lyapunov function decays exponentially for every μ≥0\mu\ge0μ≥0. They then show that standard ODE-solver constructions applied to this flow (implicit Euler, Gauss–Seidel splitting, predictor–corrector, gradient correction) produce explicit methods with accelerated rates, and that Nesterov's method is one of them. This mission formalises the paper's analysis of the predictor–corrector scheme of §5.2, its first explicit accelerated method.

Setting

Let VVV be a real Hilbert space with inner product ⟨⋅,⋅⟩\langle\cdot,\cdot\rangle⟨⋅,⋅⟩ and norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥. A function f:V→Rf:V\to\mathbb Rf:V→R with gradient map ∇f\nabla f∇f belongs to Sμ1\mathcal S^1_\muSμ1​ (with μ≥0\mu\ge0μ≥0) if it is continuously differentiable and μ\muμ-convex:

f(x)−f(y)−⟨∇f(y),x−y⟩≥μ2∥x−y∥2∀x,y∈V.f(x)-f(y)-\langle\nabla f(y),x-y\rangle\ge\tfrac{\mu}{2}\|x-y\|^2\qquad\forall x,y\in V.f(x)−f(y)−⟨∇f(y),x−y⟩≥2μ​∥x−y∥2∀x,y∈V.

It belongs to Sμ,L1,1\mathcal S^{1,1}_{\mu,L}Sμ,L1,1​ if moreover ∇f\nabla f∇f is LLL-Lipschitz with 0≤μ≤L<∞0\le\mu\le L<\infty0≤μ≤L<∞. The value μ=0\mu=0μ=0 (plain convexity) is allowed throughout. A point x∗x^*x∗ minimises fff globally.

The method keeps two iterates xk,vkx_k,v_kxk​,vk​, a step size αk>0\alpha_k>0αk​>0 and a parameter γk>0\gamma_k>0γk​>0 that evolves by the implicit parameter equation

γk+1−γkαk=μ−γk+1,γ0>0.(73)\frac{\gamma_{k+1}-\gamma_k}{\alpha_k}=\mu-\gamma_{k+1},\qquad\gamma_0>0.\tag{73}αk​γk+1​−γk​​=μ−γk+1​,γ0​>0.(73)

The predictor–corrector scheme computes a predictor yky_kyk​, then vk+1v_{k+1}vk+1​, then the corrector xk+1x_{k+1}xk+1​:

yk−xkαk=vk−yk,vk+1−vkαk=μγk(yk−vk+1)−1γk∇f(yk),xk+1−xkαk=vk+1−xk+1.(83)\frac{y_k-x_k}{\alpha_k}=v_k-y_k,\qquad\frac{v_{k+1}-v_k}{\alpha_k}=\frac{\mu}{\gamma_k}(y_k-v_{k+1})-\frac{1}{\gamma_k}\nabla f(y_k),\qquad\frac{x_{k+1}-x_k}{\alpha_k}=v_{k+1}-x_{k+1}.\tag{83}αk​yk​−xk​​=vk​−yk​,αk​vk+1​−vk​​=γk​μ​(yk​−vk+1​)−γk​1​∇f(yk​),αk​xk+1​−xk​​=vk+1​−xk+1​.(83)

Every line is linear in the unknown, so one step costs one gradient evaluation. The Lyapunov function is

Lk=f(xk)−f(x∗)+γk2∥vk−x∗∥2.(74)\mathcal L_k=f(x_k)-f(x^*)+\frac{\gamma_k}{2}\|v_k-x^*\|^2.\tag{74}Lk​=f(xk​)−f(x∗)+2γk​​∥vk​−x∗∥2.(74)

The Gauss–Seidel step (80) is the scheme without the predictor: (xk+1−xk)/αk=vk−xk+1(x_{k+1}-x_k)/\alpha_k=v_k-x_{k+1}(xk+1​−xk​)/αk​=vk​−xk+1​ and the vvv-update evaluated at xk+1x_{k+1}xk+1​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 5.1

If f∈Sμ,L1,1f\in\mathcal S^{1,1}_{\mu,L}f∈Sμ,L1,1​ and the step sizes satisfy Lαk2=γk(1+αk)L\alpha_k^2=\gamma_k(1+\alpha_k)Lαk2​=γk​(1+αk​), then every run of (83) with (73) satisfies

Lk+1≤Lk1+αk(k∈N),(86)\mathcal L_{k+1}\le\frac{\mathcal L_k}{1+\alpha_k}\quad(k\in\mathbb N),\tag{86}Lk+1​≤1+αk​Lk​​(k∈N),(86) Lk≤L0min⁡{4L(γ0 k+2L)2,(1+min⁡{γ0,μ}L)−k}(k≥0),(87)\mathcal L_k\le\mathcal L_0\min\left\{\frac{4L}{(\sqrt{\gamma_0}\,k+2\sqrt L)^2},\left(1+\sqrt{\tfrac{\min\{\gamma_0,\mu\}}{L}}\right)^{-k}\right\}\quad(k\ge0),\tag{87}Lk​≤L0​min{(γ0​​k+2L​)24L​,(1+Lmin{γ0​,μ}​​)−k}(k≥0),(87) Lk≤Cγ0,Lmin⁡{4k2,(1+min⁡{γ0,μ}L)1−k}(k≥1),(88)\mathcal L_k\le C_{\gamma_0,L}\min\left\{\frac{4}{k^2},\left(1+\sqrt{\tfrac{\min\{\gamma_0,\mu\}}{L}}\right)^{1-k}\right\}\quad(k\ge1),\tag{88}Lk​≤Cγ0​,L​min{k24​,(1+Lmin{γ0​,μ}​​)1−k}(k≥1),(88)

with Cγ0,L=Lγ0(f(x0)−f(x∗))+L2∥v0−x∗∥2C_{\gamma_0,L}=\frac{L}{\gamma_0}(f(x_0)-f(x^*))+\frac L2\|v_0-x^*\|^2Cγ0​,L​=γ0​L​(f(x0​)−f(x∗))+2L​∥v0​−x∗∥2. All three conclusions are part of the goal; (86) alone would not carry the rate.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 5.1 (p. 19): for one Gauss–Seidel step (80) with any αk>0\alpha_k>0αk​>0 and f∈Sμ1f\in\mathcal S^1_\muf∈Sμ1​, the estimates (81) and (82) on Lk+1−Lk\mathcal L_{k+1}-\mathcal L_kLk+1​−Lk​.
  2. The bound on L^k\widehat{\mathcal L}_kLk​ (p. 20), where L^k=f(yk)−f(x∗)+γk+12∥vk+1−x∗∥2\widehat{\mathcal L}_k=f(y_k)-f(x^*)+\frac{\gamma_{k+1}}2\|v_{k+1}-x^*\|^2Lk​=f(yk​)−f(x∗)+2γk+1​​∥vk+1​−x∗∥2 (84).
  3. The corrector relation (p. 20): xk+1−yk=αk1+αk(vk+1−vk)x_{k+1}-y_k=\frac{\alpha_k}{1+\alpha_k}(v_{k+1}-v_k)xk+1​−yk​=1+αk​αk​​(vk+1​−vk​).
  4. Inequality (85) (p. 21): Lk+1≤Lk1+αk+(Lαk22(1+αk)2−γk2(1+αk))∥vk+1−vk∥2\mathcal L_{k+1}\le\frac{\mathcal L_k}{1+\alpha_k}+\Bigl(\frac{L\alpha_k^2}{2(1+\alpha_k)^2}-\frac{\gamma_k}{2(1+\alpha_k)}\Bigr)\|v_{k+1}-v_k\|^2Lk+1​≤1+αk​Lk​​+(2(1+αk​)2Lαk2​​−2(1+αk​)γk​​)∥vk+1​−vk​∥2 for any αk>0\alpha_k>0αk​>0.
  5. Lemma B.2 (pp. 38–39): positivity of γk\gamma_kγk​, the lower bound αk≥min⁡{γ0,μ}/L\alpha_k\ge\sqrt{\min\{\gamma_0,\mu\}/L}αk​≥min{γ0​,μ}/L​, and two-sided bounds on ∏i<k(1+αi)−1\prod_{i<k}(1+\alpha_i)^{-1}∏i<k​(1+αi​)−1.
  6. The α0\alpha_0α0​ bound (p. 21): 11+α0≤Lγ0\frac{1}{1+\alpha_0}\le\frac{L}{\gamma_0}1+α0​1​≤γ0​L​ when Lα02=γ0(1+α0)L\alpha_0^2=\gamma_0(1+\alpha_0)Lα02​=γ0​(1+α0​).

Significance

Theorem 5.1 gives a single explicit method, with one gradient call per step and no restart, whose rate is O(L/(γ0k2))O(L/(\gamma_0k^2))O(L/(γ0​k2)) when μ=0\mu=0μ=0 and O((1+μ/L)−k)O((1+\sqrt{\mu/L})^{-k})O((1+μ/L​)−k) when μ>0\mu>0μ>0 and γ0≥μ\gamma_0\ge\muγ0​≥μ; the parameter γk\gamma_kγk​ interpolates between the two regimes automatically. Both rates are the optimal ones for first-order methods. The same Lyapunov argument, with Lemma B.2 as its rate engine, is reused in the paper for the gradient-corrected scheme (Theorem 5.2), Nesterov's method (Theorem 6.1) and the composite methods of §7, so the milestones of this mission are the shared core of the series.

The result is proved in the paper, with the proof of Lemma B.2 omitted as similar to that of Lemma B.1. No machine-checked proof of Theorem 5.1, Lemma 5.1 or Lemma B.2 is known. A formalisation checks the omitted proof, fixes the exact hypotheses of each step (which estimate needs only μ\muμ-convexity and which needs the Lipschitz gradient), and supplies a reusable discrete Lyapunov toolkit for accelerated methods in Hilbert space.

Difficulty

The obvious approach, imitating the continuous argument with the Gauss–Seidel splitting (80), fails: Lemma 5.1 leaves the cross term −αk⟨∇f(xk+1),vk+1−vk⟩-\alpha_k\langle\nabla f(x_{k+1}),v_{k+1}-v_k\rangle−αk​⟨∇f(xk+1​),vk+1​−vk​⟩, which has no sign, and bounding it by Cauchy–Schwarz as in (82) produces a positive gradient term that destroys the contraction. The predictor–corrector scheme is designed so that this cross term cancels exactly against the descent inequality for fff between yky_kyk​ and xk+1x_{k+1}xk+1​, and the remaining square vanishes only under the precise step rule Lαk2=γk(1+αk)L\alpha_k^2=\gamma_k(1+\alpha_k)Lαk2​=γk​(1+αk​). Turning the contraction into the rates (87)–(88) requires lower bounds on αk\alpha_kαk​ that hold uniformly in μ≥0\mu\ge0μ≥0, which is the content of Lemma B.2. When μ=0\mu=0μ=0 the linear-rate bound is vacuous, so the O(1/k2)O(1/k^2)O(1/k2) rate must come from a separate estimate.

Formalization scope

  • VVV is a real Hilbert space (NormedAddCommGroup, InnerProductSpace ℝ, CompleteSpace); the paper's duality pairing and dual norm are the inner product and the norm, by the Riesz identification.
  • The gradient is an explicit map gradf : V → V with HasGradientAt f (gradf x) x at every point; Mathlib's gradient, which is 000 at non-differentiable points, is not used.
  • The classes are structures IsS1 and IsS11. The class Sμ,L1,1\mathcal S^{1,1}_{\mu,L}Sμ,L1,1​ includes 0<L0<L0<L and μ≤L\mu\le Lμ≤L; the upper quadratic bound (4) is a consequence, not an assumption.
  • The scheme (83), the Gauss–Seidel step (80) and the parameter equation (73) are hypotheses on given sequences, each line in the paper's difference-quotient form. Implicit lines are kept as equations. The step sizes are any positive sequence satisfying Lαk2=γk(1+αk)L\alpha_k^2=\gamma_k(1+\alpha_k)Lαk2​=γk​(1+αk​); no closed form is substituted.
  • x∗x^*x∗ is a global minimiser of fff (the paper's standing assumption on p. 2).
  • Indices start at 000; the powers (1+s)−k(1+s)^{-k}(1+s)−k and (1+s)1−k(1+s)^{1-k}(1+s)1−k are integer powers; (88) is stated for k≥1k\ge1k≥1, (87) for all k≥0k\ge0k≥0.
  • Lemma 5.1 is stated for a single step with γk>0\gamma_k>0γk​>0 given, which is the form in which §5.2 applies it to the predictor yky_kyk​.
  • In Lemma B.2, the paper's L:=sup⁡kLkL:=\sup_kL_kL:=supk​Lk​ is replaced by an arbitrary real upper bound LLL of (Lk)(L_k)(Lk​); both conclusions involving LLL weaken as LLL grows, so this is equivalent when the supremum is finite.

A statement that assumed Lk+1≤Lk/(1+αk)\mathcal L_{k+1}\le\mathcal L_k/(1+\alpha_k)Lk+1​≤Lk​/(1+αk​) and derived only the rates, or that quantified over arbitrary sequences rather than runs of (83), would be Lemma B.2's corollary and not Theorem 5.1; the goal quantifies over runs of the scheme.

The development needs elementary Hilbert-space identities, the descent inequality (4) for functions with Lipschitz gradient, and real-sequence estimates for products and square roots. The same definitions and Lemma B.2 recur in the series' missions on Theorems 5.2, 7.2 and 7.3. Proofs of any milestone, and of (4) as an auxiliary lemma, are welcome.

Selected references

  • H. Luo and L. Chen, From differential equation solvers to accelerated first-order methods for convex optimization, Mathematical Programming, 2022. Preprint arXiv:1909.03145v4. https://arxiv.org/abs/1909.03145
  • W. Su, S. Boyd and E. J. Candès, A differential equation for modeling Nesterov's accelerated gradient method: theory and insights, Journal of Machine Learning Research 17(153), 2016. https://arxiv.org/abs/1503.01243
  • Y. Nesterov, Lectures on Convex Optimization, 2nd ed., Springer Optimization and Its Applications 137, 2018. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-319-91578-4
8 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

From Differential Equation Solvers to Accelerated First-Order Methods for Convex Optimization 5: The Gradient-Corrected Scheme Contracts ℒ_k by 1/(1 + α_k) and Has the Rate of Theorem 5.1Research Paper

Motivation

Nesterov's accelerated gradient method minimises a smooth convex function fff to accuracy ε\varepsilonε in O(1/ε)O(1/\sqrt{\varepsilon})O(1/ε​) gradient evaluations, against O(1/ε)O(1/\varepsilon)O(1/ε) for plain gradient descent, and this rate is optimal for first-order methods (Nesterov 2018). The method is usually presented through estimate sequences, which certify the rate but say little about where the iteration comes from. A line of work starting with Su, Boyd and Candès (2016) and Wibisono, Wilson and Jordan (2016) reads accelerated methods as discretisations of ordinary differential equations, with a Lyapunov function carrying the convergence proof from continuous to discrete time.

Luo and Chen introduce the NAG flow, a first-order system in a position variable xxx, a velocity-like variable vvv and a damping parameter γ\gammaγ, which covers the convex case (μ=0\mu=0μ=0) and the strongly convex case (μ>0\mu>0μ>0) in one equation. They then examine which numerical schemes for this flow keep its exponential Lyapunov decay. The implicit scheme does (Theorem 4.1), but needs a proximal step. The explicit Gauss–Seidel splitting (80) does not: its one-step estimate leaves a positive term αk22γk∥∇f(xk+1)∥2\frac{\alpha_k^2}{2\gamma_k}\|\nabla f(x_{k+1})\|^22γk​αk2​​∥∇f(xk+1​)∥2 (Lemma 5.1). Section 5 repairs it in two ways. This mission formalises the second one, from §5.3: a gradient correction step appended to the splitting.

Setting

Let VVV be a real Hilbert space with inner product ⟨⋅,⋅⟩\langle\cdot,\cdot\rangle⟨⋅,⋅⟩ and norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥. A differentiable function f:V→Rf:V\to\mathbb Rf:V→R with gradient ∇f\nabla f∇f belongs to Sμ1\mathcal S^1_\muSμ1​ (μ≥0\mu\ge0μ≥0) if

f(x)−f(y)−⟨∇f(y),x−y⟩ ≥ μ2∥x−y∥2∀x,y,f(x)-f(y)-\langle\nabla f(y),x-y\rangle\ \ge\ \tfrac{\mu}{2}\|x-y\|^2\quad\forall x,y,f(x)−f(y)−⟨∇f(y),x−y⟩ ≥ 2μ​∥x−y∥2∀x,y,

and ∇f\nabla f∇f is continuous. It belongs to Sμ,L1,1\mathcal S^{1,1}_{\mu,L}Sμ,L1,1​ if moreover ∇f\nabla f∇f is LLL-Lipschitz with 0<L<∞0<L<\infty0<L<∞, and 0≤μ≤L0\le\mu\le L0≤μ≤L. A global minimiser x∗x^*x∗ of fff is assumed to exist.

The scheme carries a step size αk>0\alpha_k>0αk​>0 and a damping parameter γk\gamma_kγk​ governed by the implicit recursion

γk+1−γkαk=μ−γk+1,γ0>0.(73)\frac{\gamma_{k+1}-\gamma_k}{\alpha_k}=\mu-\gamma_{k+1},\qquad\gamma_0>0.\qquad(73)αk​γk+1​−γk​​=μ−γk+1​,γ0​>0.(73)

Given (xk,vk)(x_k,v_k)(xk​,vk​), the gradient-corrected scheme (91) computes

yk−xkαk=vk−yk,vk+1−vkαk=μγk(yk−vk+1)−1γk∇f(yk),xk+1=yk−1L∇f(yk).\frac{y_k-x_k}{\alpha_k}=v_k-y_k,\qquad \frac{v_{k+1}-v_k}{\alpha_k}=\frac{\mu}{\gamma_k}(y_k-v_{k+1})-\frac{1}{\gamma_k}\nabla f(y_k),\qquad x_{k+1}=y_k-\frac1L\nabla f(y_k).αk​yk​−xk​​=vk​−yk​,αk​vk+1​−vk​​=γk​μ​(yk​−vk+1​)−γk​1​∇f(yk​),xk+1​=yk​−L1​∇f(yk​).

The first two lines are the Gauss–Seidel splitting (80) with output yky_kyk​. Both can be solved explicitly, so one step costs one gradient evaluation, at yky_kyk​. The third line is a gradient descent step from yky_kyk​.

The discrete Lyapunov function is

Lk=f(xk)−f(x∗)+γk2∥vk−x∗∥2,(74)\mathcal L_k=f(x_k)-f(x^*)+\frac{\gamma_k}{2}\|v_k-x^*\|^2,\qquad(74)Lk​=f(xk​)−f(x∗)+2γk​​∥vk​−x∗∥2,(74)

and the proof also uses the intermediate value L^k=f(yk)−f(x∗)+γk+12∥vk+1−x∗∥2\widehat{\mathcal L}_k=f(y_k)-f(x^*)+\frac{\gamma_{k+1}}{2}\|v_{k+1}-x^*\|^2Lk​=f(yk​)−f(x∗)+2γk+1​​∥vk+1​−x∗∥2 (84).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 5.2

If f∈Sμ,L1,1f\in\mathcal S^{1,1}_{\mu,L}f∈Sμ,L1,1​ and the step sizes satisfy Lαk2=γk(1+αk)L\alpha_k^2=\gamma_k(1+\alpha_k)Lαk2​=γk​(1+αk​), then every run of (91) together with (73) satisfies

Lk+1≤Lk1+αk(k∈N),(92)\mathcal L_{k+1}\le\frac{\mathcal L_k}{1+\alpha_k}\quad(k\in\mathbb N),\qquad(92)Lk+1​≤1+αk​Lk​​(k∈N),(92) Lk≤L0min⁡{4L(γ0 k+2L)2,(1+min⁡{γ0,μ}L)−k}(k≥0),(87)\mathcal L_k\le\mathcal L_0\min\Bigl\{\frac{4L}{(\sqrt{\gamma_0}\,k+2\sqrt L)^2},\Bigl(1+\sqrt{\tfrac{\min\{\gamma_0,\mu\}}{L}}\Bigr)^{-k}\Bigr\}\quad(k\ge0),\qquad(87)Lk​≤L0​min{(γ0​​k+2L​)24L​,(1+Lmin{γ0​,μ}​​)−k}(k≥0),(87) Lk≤Cγ0,Lmin⁡{4k2,(1+min⁡{γ0,μ}L)1−k}(k≥1),(88)\mathcal L_k\le C_{\gamma_0,L}\min\Bigl\{\frac{4}{k^2},\Bigl(1+\sqrt{\tfrac{\min\{\gamma_0,\mu\}}{L}}\Bigr)^{1-k}\Bigr\}\quad(k\ge1),\qquad(88)Lk​≤Cγ0​,L​min{k24​,(1+Lmin{γ0​,μ}​​)1−k}(k≥1),(88)

with Cγ0,L=Lγ0(f(x0)−f(x∗))+L2∥v0−x∗∥2C_{\gamma_0,L}=\frac{L}{\gamma_0}(f(x_0)-f(x^*))+\frac{L}{2}\|v_0-x^*\|^2Cγ0​,L​=γ0​L​(f(x0​)−f(x∗))+2L​∥v0​−x∗∥2 (89). The paper states (87) and (88) by reference to Theorem 5.1; the goal writes them out.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 5.1 (p. 19): the one-step estimates (81) and (82) for one Gauss–Seidel step and f∈Sμ1f\in\mathcal S^1_\muf∈Sμ1​.
  2. (93) (p. 22): (82) applied to the first two lines of (91), L^k−Lk≤−αkL^k+αk22γk∥∇f(yk)∥2\widehat{\mathcal L}_k-\mathcal L_k\le-\alpha_k\widehat{\mathcal L}_k+\frac{\alpha_k^2}{2\gamma_k}\|\nabla f(y_k)\|^2Lk​−Lk​≤−αk​Lk​+2γk​αk2​​∥∇f(yk​)∥2.
  3. (94) (p. 22): the descent inequality f(xk+1)−f(yk)≤−12L∥∇f(yk)∥2f(x_{k+1})-f(y_k)\le-\frac{1}{2L}\|\nabla f(y_k)\|^2f(xk+1​)−f(yk​)≤−2L1​∥∇f(yk​)∥2.
  4. Lk+1≤L^k−12L∥∇f(yk)∥2\mathcal L_{k+1}\le\widehat{\mathcal L}_k-\frac1{2L}\|\nabla f(y_k)\|^2Lk+1​≤Lk​−2L1​∥∇f(yk​)∥2 (p. 22).
  5. The combined estimate (p. 22): Lk+1−Lk≤−αkLk+1+12Lγk(Lαk2−γk(1+αk))∥∇f(yk)∥2\mathcal L_{k+1}-\mathcal L_k\le-\alpha_k\mathcal L_{k+1}+\frac{1}{2L\gamma_k}(L\alpha_k^2-\gamma_k(1+\alpha_k))\|\nabla f(y_k)\|^2Lk+1​−Lk​≤−αk​Lk+1​+2Lγk​1​(Lαk2​−γk​(1+αk​))∥∇f(yk​)∥2 for arbitrary αk>0\alpha_k>0αk​>0.
  6. Lemma B.2 (pp. 38–39): positivity of γk\gamma_kγk​, the lower bound αk≥min⁡{γ0,μ}/L\alpha_k\ge\sqrt{\min\{\gamma_0,\mu\}/L}αk​≥min{γ0​,μ}/L​, and two-sided bounds on ∏i<k(1+αi)−1\prod_{i<k}(1+\alpha_i)^{-1}∏i<k​(1+αi​)−1.
  7. The bound on 1/(1+α0)1/(1+\alpha_0)1/(1+α0​) (proof of Theorem 5.1, p. 21): 11+α0≤Lγ0\frac{1}{1+\alpha_0}\le\frac{L}{\gamma_0}1+α0​1​≤γ0​L​, which yields the constant (89).

Significance

Theorem 5.2 gives an explicit, one-gradient-per-step method with the accelerated rate O(1/k2)O(1/k^2)O(1/k2) for convex fff and the accelerated linear rate (1+min⁡{γ0,μ}/L)−k(1+\sqrt{\min\{\gamma_0,\mu\}/L})^{-k}(1+min{γ0​,μ}/L​)−k for strongly convex fff. The convex and strongly convex cases are covered by a single Lyapunov argument, with no restart and no prior knowledge of whether μ>0\mu>0μ>0 beyond its value in (73). The analysis is modular: (92) holds for any correction step with the decay property (94). Section 7 of the paper reuses it for composite problems, replacing the gradient step by a proximal gradient step.

This result is proved in the paper; nothing here is open. To our knowledge none of these statements has been machine-checked. A completed mission gives a checked Lyapunov proof of an accelerated method on a general Hilbert space, with the step sizes left as arbitrary roots of Lαk2=γk(1+αk)L\alpha_k^2=\gamma_k(1+\alpha_k)Lαk2​=γk​(1+αk​) rather than fixed by a closed formula. The paper omits the proof of Lemma B.2 ("Similarly, …"), so formalising it supplies a missing argument.

Difficulty

The naive analysis of the Gauss–Seidel splitting fails. The term αk22γk∥∇f∥2\frac{\alpha_k^2}{2\gamma_k}\|\nabla f\|^22γk​αk2​​∥∇f∥2 in (82) is positive, so this estimate yields no contraction of Lk\mathcal L_kLk​ for any step size; the paper notes that the splitting (80) "does not lead to the contraction property" (p. 19). The correction works only because Lk+1\mathcal L_{k+1}Lk+1​ and L^k\widehat{\mathcal L}_kLk​ share vk+1v_{k+1}vk+1​ and γk+1\gamma_{k+1}γk+1​, and differ only in the fff-value at xk+1x_{k+1}xk+1​ against yky_kyk​. The step-size rule then has to cancel the two gradient-norm terms exactly. The rates (87)–(88) need a second, independent argument: a discrete comparison for the product ∏i<k(1+αi)−1\prod_{i<k}(1+\alpha_i)^{-1}∏i<k​(1+αi​)−1 under the coupled recursions for αk\alpha_kαk​ and γk\gamma_kγk​ (Lemma B.2). The descent inequality (94) requires the quadratic upper bound (4), which the formalization does not assume. It must be derived from the Lipschitz continuity of ∇f\nabla f∇f on a Hilbert space.

Formalization scope

All statements live in the namespace NAGFlow.GradCorr, with one definitions file NAGFlow.GradCorr.Setting. The conventions are as follows.

  • VVV is a real Hilbert space: [NormedAddCommGroup V] [InnerProductSpace ℝ V] [CompleteSpace V]. The paper's duality pairing and dual norm ∥⋅∥∗\|\cdot\|_*∥⋅∥∗​ are the inner product and the norm (Riesz).
  • ∇f\nabla f∇f is an explicit map gradf : V → V with HasGradientAt f (gradf x) x at every point, never Mathlib's gradient. The classes are the structures IsS1 and IsS11. IsS11 contains 0<L0<L0<L and μ≤L\mu\le Lμ≤L; inequality (4) is not assumed.
  • x∗x^*x∗ is any point with f(x∗)≤f(y)f(x^*)\le f(y)f(x∗)≤f(y) for all yyy.
  • The scheme (91) and the recursion (73) are hypotheses on given sequences (IsGCRun, IsGammaRun), indexed from 000. The two implicit lines are kept as equations. γ0>0\gamma_0>0γ0​>0 and αk>0\alpha_k>0αk​>0 are part of IsGammaRun.
  • The step sizes are any positive sequence with Lαk2=γk(1+αk)L\alpha_k^2=\gamma_k(1+\alpha_k)Lαk2​=γk​(1+αk​), not a closed formula.
  • μ=0\mu=0μ=0 is allowed throughout, so min⁡{γ0,μ}\min\{\gamma_0,\mu\}min{γ0​,μ} may be 000.
  • Negative powers are integer powers (zpow), and (88) is stated for k≥1k\ge1k≥1.
  • In Lemma B.2, L:=sup⁡kLkL:=\sup_kL_kL:=supk​Lk​ is encoded as an arbitrary real upper bound of (Lk)(L_k)(Lk​). The conclusions involving LLL weaken as LLL grows.

The goal quantifies over runs of the scheme (91) itself. A version that assumes the contraction (92), or that fixes αk\alpha_kαk​ by a formula that makes (91) degenerate, would not be this theorem.

The development needs the quadratic upper bound for LLL-smooth functions on a Hilbert space, a one-step Lyapunov estimate for the splitting, and the scalar sequence analysis of Lemma B.2. The last two are shared with the predictor–corrector and composite missions of this series. Lemma B.2 and the α0\alpha_0α0​ bound are statements about real sequences only and can be reused independently. Contributions to any milestone are welcome.

Selected references

  • H. Luo and L. Chen, From differential equation solvers to accelerated first-order methods for convex optimization, Mathematical Programming, 2022. Preprint arXiv:1909.03145v4. https://arxiv.org/abs/1909.03145
  • W. Su, S. Boyd and E. J. Candès, A differential equation for modeling Nesterov's accelerated gradient method: theory and insights, Journal of Machine Learning Research 17(153), 2016. https://arxiv.org/abs/1503.01243
  • A. Wibisono, A. C. Wilson and M. I. Jordan, A variational perspective on accelerated methods in optimization, Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences 113(47), 2016. https://arxiv.org/abs/1603.04245
  • Y. Nesterov, Lectures on Convex Optimization, 2nd ed., Springer Optimization and Its Applications 137, 2018. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-319-91578-4
10 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

From Differential Equation Solvers to Accelerated First-Order Methods for Convex Optimization 7: Semi-APGM for min h + g Contracts ℒ_k by 1/(1 + α_k) and Has the Rate of Theorem 5.1Research Paper

Motivation

Many problems in signal processing, statistics and control are posed as composite convex minimisation: minimise f=h+gf = h + gf=h+g, where hhh is smooth and ggg is convex but possibly nonsmooth or extended-valued (an ℓ1\ell^1ℓ1 penalty, a nuclear norm, the indicator of a constraint set). Proximal gradient methods handle ggg through its proximal operator and hhh through its gradient. Their accelerated versions, Nesterov's composite method (Nesterov 2013) and FISTA (Beck–Teboulle 2009), reach the optimal O(L/k2)O(L/k^2)O(L/k2) rate for convex problems, and separate variants exist for the strongly convex case.

Luo and Chen (arXiv:1909.03145, Math. Program. 2022) derive accelerated methods as discretisations of a single ODE, the NAG flow, and analyse every scheme with one discrete Lyapunov function. Section 7.2 extends their corrected semi-implicit scheme from smooth fff to f=h+gf = h + gf=h+g by replacing ∇f\nabla f∇f with the composite gradient mapping. The result is Algorithm 2 (Semi-APGM). It calls the proximal operator once per iteration, and Theorem 7.2 shows that it has the same rate as the smooth methods, in the convex and the strongly convex case at once.

Setting

VVV is a real Hilbert space with inner product ⟨⋅,⋅⟩\langle\cdot,\cdot\rangle⟨⋅,⋅⟩ and norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥. The smooth part h:V→Rh : V \to \mathbb Rh:V→R has gradient ∇h\nabla h∇h and lies in the class Sμ,L1,1\mathcal S^{1,1}_{\mu,L}Sμ,L1,1​, with 0≤μ≤L<∞0 \le \mu \le L < \infty0≤μ≤L<∞ and L>0L > 0L>0. That is, hhh is μ\muμ-convex,

h(x)−h(y)−⟨∇h(y),x−y⟩≥μ2∥x−y∥2,h(x) - h(y) - \langle \nabla h(y), x - y\rangle \ge \tfrac{\mu}{2}\|x - y\|^2,h(x)−h(y)−⟨∇h(y),x−y⟩≥2μ​∥x−y∥2,

and ∇h\nabla h∇h is LLL-Lipschitz. The nonsmooth part g:V→R∪{+∞}g : V \to \mathbb R \cup \{+\infty\}g:V→R∪{+∞} is proper, closed and convex, with effective domain D=dom⁡gD = \operatorname{dom} gD=domg. The subdifferential is ∂g(x)={p:g(y)≥g(x)+⟨p,y−x⟩ ∀y}\partial g(x) = \{p : g(y) \ge g(x) + \langle p, y - x\rangle\ \forall y\}∂g(x)={p:g(y)≥g(x)+⟨p,y−x⟩ ∀y}. The proximal operator is

prox⁡ηg(z)=argmin⁡y∈V{g(y)+12η∥y−z∥2}.\operatorname{prox}_{\eta g}(z) = \operatorname{argmin}_{y \in V}\Big\{ g(y) + \tfrac{1}{2\eta}\|y - z\|^2 \Big\}.proxηg​(z)=argminy∈V​{g(y)+2η1​∥y−z∥2}.

With step η=1/L\eta = 1/Lη=1/L, set Sf(x)=prox⁡g/L(x−∇h(x)/L)S_f(x) = \operatorname{prox}_{g/L}(x - \nabla h(x)/L)Sf​(x)=proxg/L​(x−∇h(x)/L) and Gf(x)=L(x−Sf(x))\mathcal G_f(x) = L(x - S_f(x))Gf​(x)=L(x−Sf​(x)), the composite gradient mapping. Fix a minimiser x∗x^*x∗ of fff.

Algorithm 2 starts from x0,v0∈Vx_0, v_0 \in Vx0​,v0​∈V and γ0>0\gamma_0 > 0γ0​>0. For k=0,1,…k = 0, 1, \dotsk=0,1,… it chooses αk>0\alpha_k > 0αk​>0 with Lαk2=γk(1+αk)L\alpha_k^2 = \gamma_k(1 + \alpha_k)Lαk2​=γk​(1+αk​) and sets

γk+1=γk+μαk1+αk,yk=xk+αkvk1+αk,wk=γkvk+μαkykγk+μαk,\gamma_{k+1} = \frac{\gamma_k + \mu\alpha_k}{1 + \alpha_k}, \quad y_k = \frac{x_k + \alpha_k v_k}{1 + \alpha_k}, \quad w_k = \frac{\gamma_k v_k + \mu\alpha_k y_k}{\gamma_k + \mu\alpha_k},γk+1​=1+αk​γk​+μαk​​,yk​=1+αk​xk​+αk​vk​​,wk​=γk​+μαk​γk​vk​+μαk​yk​​, xk+1=Sf(yk),vk+1=wk+γkγk+1xk+1−ykαk.x_{k+1} = S_f(y_k), \qquad v_{k+1} = w_k + \frac{\gamma_k}{\gamma_{k+1}}\frac{x_{k+1} - y_k}{\alpha_k}.xk+1​=Sf​(yk​),vk+1​=wk​+γk+1​γk​​αk​xk+1​−yk​​.

The Lyapunov function is Lk=f(xk)−f(x∗)+γk2∥vk−x∗∥2\mathcal L_k = f(x_k) - f(x^*) + \frac{\gamma_k}{2}\|v_k - x^*\|^2Lk​=f(xk​)−f(x∗)+2γk​​∥vk​−x∗∥2.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 7.2

For every run of Algorithm 2 with x0∈dom⁡gx_0 \in \operatorname{dom} gx0​∈domg,

Lk+1≤Lk1+αk∀k,Lk≤L0min⁡{4L(γ0k+2L)2,(1+min⁡{γ0,μ}L)−k},\mathcal L_{k+1} \le \frac{\mathcal L_k}{1 + \alpha_k} \quad \forall k, \qquad \mathcal L_k \le \mathcal L_0 \min\Big\{\frac{4L}{(\sqrt{\gamma_0}k + 2\sqrt L)^2}, \Big(1 + \sqrt{\tfrac{\min\{\gamma_0,\mu\}}{L}}\Big)^{-k}\Big\},Lk+1​≤1+αk​Lk​​∀k,Lk​≤L0​min{(γ0​​k+2L​)24L​,(1+Lmin{γ0​,μ}​​)−k},

and, for k≥1k \ge 1k≥1,

Lk≤Cγ0,Lmin⁡{4k2,(1+min⁡{γ0,μ}L)1−k},Cγ0,L=Lγ0(f(x0)−f(x∗))+L2∥v0−x∗∥2.\mathcal L_k \le C_{\gamma_0,L}\min\Big\{\frac{4}{k^2}, \Big(1 + \sqrt{\tfrac{\min\{\gamma_0,\mu\}}{L}}\Big)^{1-k}\Big\}, \qquad C_{\gamma_0,L} = \frac{L}{\gamma_0}\big(f(x_0) - f(x^*)\big) + \frac{L}{2}\|v_0 - x^*\|^2 .Lk​≤Cγ0​,L​min{k24​,(1+Lmin{γ0​,μ}​​)1−k},Cγ0​,L​=γ0​L​(f(x0​)−f(x∗))+2L​∥v0​−x∗∥2.

Milestones

In attack order:

  1. Algorithm 2 is a run of the semi-implicit scheme (115).
  2. The proximal optimality condition (112).
  3. The inclusion Gf(x)−∇h(x)∈∂g(Sf(x))\mathcal G_f(x) - \nabla h(x) \in \partial g(S_f(x))Gf​(x)−∇h(x)∈∂g(Sf​(x)) (113).
  4. Lemma 7.1, the quadratic lower bound (114) for fff built from Gf\mathcal G_fGf​.
  5. The one-step estimate (117) for (115) with arbitrary αk>0\alpha_k > 0αk​>0.
  6. The bound 1/(1+α0)≤L/γ01/(1 + \alpha_0) \le L/\gamma_01/(1+α0​)≤L/γ0​.
  7. Lemma B.2, which turns the contraction factors ∏1/(1+αi)\prod 1/(1 + \alpha_i)∏1/(1+αi​) into explicit rates.

Significance

The theorem gives a single accelerated proximal gradient method whose rate interpolates between O(L/k2)O(L/k^2)O(L/k2) for μ=0\mu = 0μ=0 and the linear rate (1+μ/L)−k(1 + \sqrt{\mu/L})^{-k}(1+μ/L​)−k for μ>0\mu > 0μ>0 (when γ0≥μ\gamma_0 \ge \muγ0​≥μ). Neither the method nor its parameters change between the two regimes. Lemma 7.1 is the only property of ggg that the proof uses, so the same analysis covers constraints (an indicator ggg), sparsity penalties and any other proximable term.

The result is proved on paper; this mission formalizes it. The paper's argument is short because it reuses the smooth case: "proceed as the proof of Lemma 5.1 and use Lemma 7.1". A machine-checked version has to carry out that reuse explicitly. It also has to supply the proximal facts the paper cites as well known ((112)) and the proof of Lemma B.2, which the paper omits. None of these statements is known to be formalized in Lean.

Difficulty

There is no single hard step. The work is in three places.

  • Algebra on the run. Equation (117) needs the difference identity for γ2∥v−x∗∥2\frac{\gamma}{2}\|v - x^*\|^22γ​∥v−x∗∥2, the vvv-update of (115) and two applications of Lemma 7.1, at y=x∗y = x^*y=x∗ and at y=xky = x_ky=xk​. The cross terms must cancel exactly.
  • The extended-valued function. The predictor yky_kyk​ may lie outside dom⁡g\operatorname{dom} gdomg, where the page's f(yk)f(y_k)f(yk​) is +∞+\infty+∞. An argument that evaluates fff at yky_kyk​ is invalid unless the terms involving f(yk)f(y_k)f(yk​) cancel.
  • Lemma B.2. The product bound for ∏1/(1+αi)\prod 1/(1 + \alpha_i)∏1/(1+αi​) requires a telescoping estimate on 1/ρk1/\sqrt{\rho_k}1/ρk​​ whose proof the paper does not give.

Reading Algorithm 2 as a gradient method on fff does not work, because fff is not differentiable. All smoothness has to come from hhh through Lemma 7.1.

Formalization scope

  • Space. VVV is a real Hilbert space, and the paper's duality pairing and dual norm are the inner product and the norm (Riesz).
  • Gradient. ∇h\nabla h∇h is an explicit map with a gradient at every point.
  • Encoding of ggg. The extended-valued ggg is a pair: its domain DDD and a real-valued function whose values off DDD are never used.
    • "Proper" means D≠∅D \ne \emptysetD=∅.
    • "Convex" means convex on the convex set DDD.
    • "Closed" means the epigraph {(x,t):x∈D, g(x)≤t}\{(x,t) : x \in D,\ g(x) \le t\}{(x,t):x∈D, g(x)≤t} is closed. This does not force DDD to be closed.
    • x∗x^*x∗ minimises h+gh + gh+g over DDD.
  • Named outputs. The proximal operator and SfS_fSf​ are predicates on a named output (a minimiser over DDD). Existence and uniqueness are theorems, not assumptions.
  • Added hypotheses.
    • L>0L > 0L>0, γ0>0\gamma_0 > 0γ0​>0 and αk>0\alpha_k > 0αk​>0, from the paper's class and algorithm.
    • x0∈dom⁡gx_0 \in \operatorname{dom} gx0​∈domg. Without it the page's L0\mathcal L_0L0​ is +∞+\infty+∞ and the theorem is void.
  • Corrected slip. The page's "(110) f∈Sμ,L1,1f \in \mathcal S^{1,1}_{\mu,L}f∈Sμ,L1,1​" is read as h∈Sμ,L1,1h \in \mathcal S^{1,1}_{\mu,L}h∈Sμ,L1,1​, as in (104) and Lemma 7.1.
  • Lemma B.2. L:=sup⁡kLkL := \sup_k L_kL:=supk​Lk​ is replaced by any real upper bound of (Lk)(L_k)(Lk​).
  • Ruled out. A finite-valued ggg on all of VVV, without a domain, would drop the constrained and indicator cases and is not a faithful formalization. So is a statement with hypotheses that force Lk\mathcal L_kLk​ to be trivially controlled.

All objects are defined locally under NAGFlow.APGM. A complete development needs elementary convex analysis in Hilbert space (prox optimality, the descent lemma (4) from the Lipschitz gradient) and the scalar recursion of Lemma B.2. The proximal facts and Lemma B.2 can be reused by the other missions of this series (Theorems 5.1, 5.2 and 7.3) and by any accelerated-method formalization. Contributions are welcome on any milestone, in any order.

Selected references

  • H. Luo, L. Chen, From differential equation solvers to accelerated first-order methods for convex optimization, Math. Program. 195 (2022) 735–781. arXiv:1909.03145v4. https://arxiv.org/abs/1909.03145
  • Yu. Nesterov, Gradient methods for minimizing composite functions, Math. Program. 140 (2013) 125–161. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-012-0629-5
  • A. Beck, M. Teboulle, A fast iterative shrinkage-thresholding algorithm for linear inverse problems, SIAM J. Imaging Sci. 2 (2009) 183–202. https://doi.org/10.1137/080716542
  • Yu. Nesterov, Lectures on Convex Optimization, 2nd ed., Springer, 2018. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-319-91578-4
10 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationDynamical SystemsOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

From Differential Equation Solvers to Accelerated First-Order Methods for Convex Optimization 2: The NAG Flow Has a Unique C² Solution and Its Lyapunov Function Satisfies ℒ(t) ≤ e^(−t)ℒ(0)Research Paper

Motivation

Accelerated first-order methods, above all Nesterov's accelerated gradient (NAG) method, minimize a convex function with an LLL-Lipschitz gradient to accuracy ε\varepsilonε in O(L/ε)O(\sqrt{L/\varepsilon})O(L/ε​) gradient evaluations, and a μ\muμ-strongly convex one in O(L/μlog⁡(1/ε))O(\sqrt{L/\mu}\log(1/\varepsilon))O(L/μ​log(1/ε)), against O(L/ε)O(L/\varepsilon)O(L/ε) and O((L/μ)log⁡(1/ε))O((L/\mu)\log(1/\varepsilon))O((L/μ)log(1/ε)) for gradient descent. Since Su, Boyd and Candès (arXiv:1503.01243) read Nesterov's method as a discretization of the ODE x′′+3tx′+∇f(x)=0x''+\frac3tx'+\nabla f(x)=0x′′+t3​x′+∇f(x)=0, a line of work has tried to derive accelerated methods from continuous-time models with a Lyapunov function, e.g. Wibisono, Wilson and Jordan (arXiv:1603.04245) and Wilson, Recht and Jordan (arXiv:1611.02635).

Luo and Chen (arXiv:1909.03145, Math. Program. 2022) propose a single ODE, the NAG flow, that covers the convex case μ=0\mu=0μ=0 and the strongly convex case μ>0\mu>0μ>0 at once, through a time-dependent scaling factor γ(t)\gamma(t)γ(t). Its Lyapunov function decays like e−te^{-t}e−t for every μ≥0\mu\ge0μ≥0. The rest of their paper discretizes this flow (implicit, predictor–corrector, gradient-corrected and semi-implicit schemes; missions 3–8 of this series) and transfers the decay to the discrete Lyapunov function. This mission formalizes the continuous result, Lemma 3.2 of the paper, on which those discretizations are modelled.

Setting

Let VVV be a real Hilbert space with inner product ⟨⋅,⋅⟩\langle\cdot,\cdot\rangle⟨⋅,⋅⟩ and norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥. A function f:V→Rf:V\to\mathbb Rf:V→R is in the class Sμ1\mathcal S^1_\muSμ1​ if it is continuously differentiable and, for some μ≥0\mu\ge0μ≥0,

f(x)−f(y)−⟨∇f(y),x−y⟩ ≥ μ2∥x−y∥2∀ x,y∈V,f(x)-f(y)-\langle\nabla f(y),x-y\rangle\ \ge\ \frac{\mu}{2}\|x-y\|^2\qquad\forall\,x,y\in V,f(x)−f(y)−⟨∇f(y),x−y⟩ ≥ 2μ​∥x−y∥2∀x,y∈V,

the μ\muμ-convexity of fff (strong convexity when μ>0\mu>0μ>0). It is in Sμ,L1,1\mathcal S^{1,1}_{\mu,L}Sμ,L1,1​ if moreover ∇f\nabla f∇f is LLL-Lipschitz with 0<L<∞0<L<\infty0<L<∞. A global minimizer x∗x^*x∗ of fff is assumed to exist.

The scaling factor solves γ′=μ−γ\gamma'=\mu-\gammaγ′=μ−γ, γ(0)=γ0>0\gamma(0)=\gamma_0>0γ(0)=γ0​>0:

γ(t)=μ+(γ0−μ)e−t,t≥0.\gamma(t)=\mu+(\gamma_0-\mu)e^{-t},\qquad t\ge0 .γ(t)=μ+(γ0​−μ)e−t,t≥0.

It is positive for all t≥0t\ge0t≥0 and tends to μ\muμ; for μ=0\mu=0μ=0 it is γ0e−t\gamma_0e^{-t}γ0​e−t.

The NAG flow is the first-order system

x′=v−x,γv′=μ(x−v)−∇f(x),x(0)=x0, v(0)=v0,(56)x'=v-x,\qquad \gamma v'=\mu(x-v)-\nabla f(x),\qquad x(0)=x_0,\ v(0)=v_0, \tag{56}x′=v−x,γv′=μ(x−v)−∇f(x),x(0)=x0​, v(0)=v0​,(56)

or, equivalently, the second-order equation

γx′′+(μ+γ)x′+∇f(x)=0,x(0)=x0, x′(0)=v0−x0.(57)\gamma x''+(\mu+\gamma)x'+\nabla f(x)=0,\qquad x(0)=x_0,\ x'(0)=v_0-x_0. \tag{57}γx′′+(μ+γ)x′+∇f(x)=0,x(0)=x0​, x′(0)=v0​−x0​.(57)

Its Lyapunov function is

L(t)=f(x(t))−f(x∗)+γ(t)2∥v(t)−x∗∥2,v=x+x′.(58)\mathcal L(t)=f(x(t))-f(x^*)+\frac{\gamma(t)}{2}\|v(t)-x^*\|^2,\qquad v=x+x'. \tag{58}L(t)=f(x(t))−f(x∗)+2γ(t)​∥v(t)−x∗∥2,v=x+x′.(58)

Formalization targets

Goal: Lemma 3.2 (p. 13)

If f∈Sμ,L1,1f\in\mathcal S^{1,1}_{\mu,L}f∈Sμ,L1,1​ with μ≥0\mu\ge0μ≥0, then (57) has a unique solution x∈C2([0,∞);V)x\in C^2([0,\infty);V)x∈C2([0,∞);V), and

L′(t)≤−L(t)−μ2∥x′(t)∥2,(59)\mathcal L'(t)\le-\mathcal L(t)-\frac{\mu}{2}\|x'(t)\|^2, \tag{59}L′(t)≤−L(t)−2μ​∥x′(t)∥2,(59) L(t)+μ2∫0tes−t∥x′(s)∥2 ds≤e−tL(0),t≥0.(60)\mathcal L(t)+\frac{\mu}{2}\int_0^te^{s-t}\|x'(s)\|^2\,ds\le e^{-t}\mathcal L(0),\qquad t\ge0. \tag{60}L(t)+2μ​∫0t​es−t∥x′(s)∥2ds≤e−tL(0),t≥0.(60)

In particular f(x(t))−f(x∗)≤e−tL(0)f(x(t))-f(x^*)\le e^{-t}\mathcal L(0)f(x(t))−f(x∗)≤e−tL(0) for all μ≥0\mu\ge0μ≥0, with no dependence on LLL in the rate.

Milestones (pp. 12–14)

  1. Lemma 3.1: 2(u−v,v−w)=∥u−w∥2−∥u−v∥2−∥v−w∥22(u-v,v-w)=\|u-w\|^2-\|u-v\|^2-\|v-w\|^22(u−v,v−w)=∥u−w∥2−∥u−v∥2−∥v−w∥2.
  2. (54): γ(t)=μ+(γ0−μ)e−t\gamma(t)=\mu+(\gamma_0-\mu)e^{-t}γ(t)=μ+(γ0​−μ)e−t is the solution of γ′=μ−γ\gamma'=\mu-\gammaγ′=μ−γ, γ(0)=γ0\gamma(0)=\gamma_0γ(0)=γ0​, is positive, and tends to μ\muμ monotonically and exponentially.
  3. Well-posedness of (56): a unique classical solution (x,v)∈C1([0,∞);V)2(x,v)\in C^1([0,\infty);V)^2(x,v)∈C1([0,∞);V)2.
  4. (56) ⇔ (57): a C1C^1C1 solution of (56) gives a C2C^2C2 solution of (57), and conversely (x,x+x′)(x,x+x')(x,x+x′) solves (56).
  5. (61): along a solution of (56), L′=⟨∇f(x),x′⟩+μ−γ2∥v−x∗∥2+⟨μ(x−v)−∇f(x),v−x∗⟩\mathcal L'=\langle\nabla f(x),x'\rangle+\frac{\mu-\gamma}{2}\|v-x^*\|^2+\langle\mu(x-v)-\nabla f(x),v-x^*\rangleL′=⟨∇f(x),x′⟩+2μ−γ​∥v−x∗∥2+⟨μ(x−v)−∇f(x),v−x∗⟩.
  6. (63): L′=μ2∥x−x∗∥2−⟨∇f(x),x−x∗⟩−γ2∥v−x∗∥2−μ2∥x′∥2\mathcal L'=\frac{\mu}{2}\|x-x^*\|^2-\langle\nabla f(x),x-x^*\rangle-\frac{\gamma}{2}\|v-x^*\|^2-\frac{\mu}{2}\|x'\|^2L′=2μ​∥x−x∗∥2−⟨∇f(x),x−x∗⟩−2γ​∥v−x∗∥2−2μ​∥x′∥2.
  7. (59) along every solution of (56), for f∈Sμ1f\in\mathcal S^1_\muf∈Sμ1​.
  8. Remark 3.1: with γ′≤μ−γ\gamma'\le\mu-\gammaγ′≤μ−γ in place of (54), (59) still holds.

Significance

The lemma gives one continuous model whose energy decays at the rate e−te^{-t}e−t uniformly in μ≥0\mu\ge0μ≥0, without separate treatment of the convex and the strongly convex cases. The paper's discrete results (Theorems 4.1, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1, 7.2 and 7.3) prove the discrete counterpart Lk+1≤Lk/(1+αk)\mathcal L_{k+1}\le\mathcal L_k/(1+\alpha_k)Lk+1​≤Lk​/(1+αk​) by mimicking the computation (61)–(63) step by step, so the continuous identities are the template of the whole paper. The integral term in (60) also bounds ∫0tes−t∥x′(s)∥2ds\int_0^te^{s-t}\|x'(s)\|^2ds∫0t​es−t∥x′(s)∥2ds when μ>0\mu>0μ>0.

The result is proved in the paper; nothing in this mission is open. To our knowledge neither the NAG flow nor its Lyapunov analysis has been formalized in Lean or another proof assistant. The mission produces a machine-checked well-posedness theorem for a non-autonomous ODE in a Hilbert space whose coefficient 1/γ(t)1/\gamma(t)1/γ(t) is unbounded on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) when μ=0\mu=0μ=0, and a machine-checked Lyapunov computation that later missions can mirror in discrete time.

Difficulty

The Lyapunov computation (61)–(63) is a direct, if careful, calculus exercise. The work lies elsewhere. Existence and uniqueness on the whole half-line [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) do not follow from a single application of a local Picard–Lindelöf theorem: the vector field (x,v)↦(v−x, (μ(x−v)−∇f(x))/γ(t))(x,v)\mapsto\big(v-x,\ (\mu(x-v)-\nabla f(x))/\gamma(t)\big)(x,v)↦(v−x, (μ(x−v)−∇f(x))/γ(t)) is globally Lipschitz in (x,v)(x,v)(x,v), but with a constant of order 1/γ(t)1/\gamma(t)1/γ(t), which grows like ete^{t}et when μ=0\mu=0μ=0. A local existence theorem on a short interval does not by itself give a solution on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞), and uniqueness must hold relative to [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) with one-sided derivatives at t=0t=0t=0. Passing from the differential inequality (59) to (60) requires L\mathcal LL to be differentiable relative to [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞), including the endpoint t=0t=0t=0, and the integrand ∥x′(s)∥2\|x'(s)\|^2∥x′(s)∥2 to be continuous, so the regularity of the solution has to be carried through every step.

Formalization scope

  • VVV is a real Hilbert space (InnerProductSpace ℝ V, CompleteSpace V); the paper's duality pairing and dual norm are the inner product and the norm (Riesz).
  • The gradient is an explicit map gradf with HasGradientAt f (gradf x) x for every xxx and gradf continuous; Mathlib's gradient is not used. Sμ,L1,1\mathcal S^{1,1}_{\mu,L}Sμ,L1,1​ includes 0≤μ≤L0\le\mu\le L0≤μ≤L and 0<L0<L0<L.
  • Time derivatives are relative to [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) (derivWithin x (Ici 0)), so one-sided at 000. Every curve differentiated this way is assumed C1C^1C1 or C2C^2C2 on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞), so the junk value 000 of derivWithin at a point of non-differentiability never enters.
  • Uniqueness is equality on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞); values at negative times are unconstrained.
  • Standing assumptions made explicit: VVV Hilbert, a global minimizer x∗x^*x∗ exists, γ0>0\gamma_0>0γ0​>0. Remark 3.1 adds that its relaxed γ\gammaγ is positive on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞), which the paper takes for granted.
  • μ=0\mu=0μ=0 is allowed throughout; no milestone assumes μ>0\mu>0μ>0. The Lipschitz hypothesis appears only where existence is claimed (milestone 3 and the goal); milestones 4–8 assume f∈Sμ1f\in\mathcal S^1_\muf∈Sμ1​ only.
  • The goal is stated for the solution of (57), whose existence and uniqueness are part of the conclusion. The trivializing reading, "if a function satisfies L′≤−L\mathcal L'\le-\mathcal LL′≤−L then L(t)≤e−tL(0)\mathcal L(t)\le e^{-t}\mathcal L(0)L(t)≤e−tL(0)", is Grönwall's inequality and is not the target.

A complete development needs: a global existence and uniqueness theorem for Lipschitz non-autonomous ODEs on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) with locally bounded Lipschitz constant (Mathlib's IsPicardLindelof and ODE_solution_unique_of_mem_Icc are the starting points), and one-sided calculus for t↦f(x(t))t\mapsto f(x(t))t↦f(x(t)) and t↦∥v(t)−x∗∥2t\mapsto\|v(t)-x^*\|^2t↦∥v(t)−x∗∥2. The global existence result for half-line ODEs is reusable well beyond this mission. Contributions are welcome on any milestone independently.

Selected references

  • H. Luo and L. Chen, From differential equation solvers to accelerated first-order methods for convex optimization, Mathematical Programming (2022); preprint arXiv:1909.03145v4. https://arxiv.org/abs/1909.03145
  • W. Su, S. Boyd and E. J. Candès, A differential equation for modeling Nesterov's accelerated gradient method: theory and insights, Journal of Machine Learning Research 17 (2016). https://arxiv.org/abs/1503.01243
  • A. Wibisono, A. C. Wilson and M. I. Jordan, A variational perspective on accelerated methods in optimization, PNAS 113 (2016). https://arxiv.org/abs/1603.04245
  • A. C. Wilson, B. Recht and M. I. Jordan, A Lyapunov analysis of accelerated methods in optimization, Journal of Machine Learning Research 22 (2021). https://arxiv.org/abs/1611.02635
  • Y. Nesterov, Lectures on Convex Optimization, Springer, 2018. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-319-91578-4
11 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

From Differential Equation Solvers to Accelerated First-Order Methods for Convex Optimization 8: Semi-AFB for min over Q of h + g Contracts ℒ_k by 1/(1 + α_k) and Has the Rate of Theorem 5.1Research Paper

Motivation

Many convex problems in signal processing, statistics and control have the composite form "smooth loss plus nonsmooth regulariser, subject to a simple constraint": a least-squares or entropy term hhh, a sparsity or total-variation penalty ggg, and a feasible set QQQ such as a box, a simplex or a cone. Accelerated proximal gradient methods (FISTA, Beck and Teboulle 2009; Nesterov's composite gradient methods) reach the optimal O(1/k2)O(1/k^2)O(1/k2) rate for such problems when Q=VQ = VQ=V. When a constraint is present, the standard schemes evaluate ∇h\nabla h∇h at extrapolated points that may leave QQQ; for an hhh such as the entropy on Q=[0,∞)Q=[0,\infty)Q=[0,∞), that gradient does not exist.

Luo and Chen (arXiv:1909.03145v4, Math. Program. 2022) derive accelerated first-order methods as discretisations of a single ODE, the NAG flow, and analyse every scheme with one discrete Lyapunov function. Their Section 7.3 turns the predictor–corrector discretisation into a forward–backward splitting, the semi-implicit accelerated forward–backward method (Semi-AFB), whose iterates stay in QQQ by construction, and proves for it the same rate as for the unconstrained smooth case.

Timeline. Tseng (2008) gave an accelerated proximal gradient method with rate O(L/k2)O(L/k^2)O(L/k2) for this problem with μ=0\mu = 0μ=0. Nesterov (Math. Program. 2013, "Gradient methods for minimizing composite functions") treated the same problem with hhh LLL-smooth on QQQ and ggg μ\muμ-strongly convex, μ≥0\mu\ge0μ≥0, and obtained the rate O(min⁡{L/k2,(1+μ/L)−k})O(\min\{L/k^2,(1+\sqrt{\mu/L})^{-k}\})O(min{L/k2,(1+μ/L​)−k}) with estimate sequences, at the cost of two proximal computations over QQQ per iteration. Luo and Chen's Theorem 7.3 (2019, revised 2022) gives the same type of rate with one proximal computation per iteration and a Lyapunov proof.

Setting

VVV is a real Hilbert space with inner product ⟨⋅,⋅⟩\langle\cdot,\cdot\rangle⟨⋅,⋅⟩ and norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥. For a set Ω⊆V\Omega\subseteq VΩ⊆V, a function hhh is in Sμ1(Ω)\mathcal S^1_\mu(\Omega)Sμ1​(Ω) if it is continuously differentiable on Ω\OmegaΩ, with gradient map ∇h\nabla h∇h, and

h(x)−h(y)−⟨∇h(y),x−y⟩ ≥ μ2∥x−y∥2∀ x,y∈Ω,μ≥0.h(x)-h(y)-\langle\nabla h(y),x-y\rangle\ \ge\ \frac{\mu}{2}\|x-y\|^2\qquad\forall\,x,y\in\Omega,\quad \mu\ge0 .h(x)−h(y)−⟨∇h(y),x−y⟩ ≥ 2μ​∥x−y∥2∀x,y∈Ω,μ≥0.

It is in Sμ,L1,1(Ω)\mathcal S^{1,1}_{\mu,L}(\Omega)Sμ,L1,1​(Ω) if moreover ∇h\nabla h∇h is LLL-Lipschitz on Ω\OmegaΩ, 0<L<∞0<L<\infty0<L<∞.

The problem (104) is

min⁡x∈Q f(x),f=h+g,\min_{x\in Q}\ f(x),\qquad f=h+g,x∈Qmin​ f(x),f=h+g,

with QQQ closed and convex, h∈Sμ,L1,1(Q)h\in\mathcal S^{1,1}_{\mu,L}(Q)h∈Sμ,L1,1​(Q), 0≤μ≤L0\le\mu\le L0≤μ≤L, and g:V→R∪{+∞}g:V\to\mathbb R\cup\{+\infty\}g:V→R∪{+∞} proper, closed and convex, with Q∩dom⁡g≠∅Q\cap\operatorname{dom}g\ne\emptysetQ∩domg=∅. Let x∗x^*x∗ be a minimiser.

Algorithm 4 (Semi-AFB). Given x0,v0∈Qx_0,v_0\in Qx0​,v0​∈Q and γ0>0\gamma_0>0γ0​>0, for k=0,1,…k=0,1,\dotsk=0,1,…: choose αk>0\alpha_k>0αk​>0 with Lαk2=γk(1+αk)L\alpha_k^2=\gamma_k(1+\alpha_k)Lαk2​=γk​(1+αk​); set γk+1=(γk+μαk)/(1+αk)\gamma_{k+1}=(\gamma_k+\mu\alpha_k)/(1+\alpha_k)γk+1​=(γk​+μαk​)/(1+αk​), yk=(xk+αkvk)/(1+αk)y_k=(x_k+\alpha_kv_k)/(1+\alpha_k)yk​=(xk​+αk​vk​)/(1+αk​) and wk=(γkvk+μαkyk)/(γk+μαk)w_k=(\gamma_kv_k+\mu\alpha_ky_k)/(\gamma_k+\mu\alpha_k)wk​=(γk​vk​+μαk​yk​)/(γk​+μαk​); let

vk+1∈argmin⁡v∈Q{g(v)+⟨∇h(yk),v⟩+γk+μαk2αk∥v−wk∥2};v_{k+1}\in\operatorname*{argmin}_{v\in Q}\Bigl\{g(v)+\langle\nabla h(y_k),v\rangle+\frac{\gamma_k+\mu\alpha_k}{2\alpha_k}\|v-w_k\|^2\Bigr\};vk+1​∈v∈Qargmin​{g(v)+⟨∇h(yk​),v⟩+2αk​γk​+μαk​​∥v−wk​∥2};

and set xk+1=(xk+αkvk+1)/(1+αk)x_{k+1}=(x_k+\alpha_kv_{k+1})/(1+\alpha_k)xk+1​=(xk​+αk​vk+1​)/(1+αk​). The Lyapunov function is

Lk=f(xk)−f(x∗)+γk2∥vk−x∗∥2.\mathcal L_k=f(x_k)-f(x^*)+\frac{\gamma_k}{2}\|v_k-x^*\|^2 .Lk​=f(xk​)−f(x∗)+2γk​​∥vk​−x∗∥2.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 7.3 (p. 33)

For every run of Algorithm 4,

Lk+1≤Lk1+αk∀k∈N,(121)\mathcal L_{k+1}\le\frac{\mathcal L_k}{1+\alpha_k}\quad\forall k\in\mathbb N,\qquad(121)Lk+1​≤1+αk​Lk​​∀k∈N,(121) Lk≤L0min⁡{4L(γ0 k+2L)2,(1+min⁡{γ0,μ}L)−k}(k≥0),(87)\mathcal L_k\le\mathcal L_0\min\Bigl\{\frac{4L}{(\sqrt{\gamma_0}\,k+2\sqrt L)^2},\Bigl(1+\sqrt{\tfrac{\min\{\gamma_0,\mu\}}{L}}\Bigr)^{-k}\Bigr\}\quad(k\ge0),\qquad(87)Lk​≤L0​min{(γ0​​k+2L​)24L​,(1+Lmin{γ0​,μ}​​)−k}(k≥0),(87) Lk≤Cγ0,Lmin⁡{4k2,(1+min⁡{γ0,μ}L)1−k}(k≥1),(88)\mathcal L_k\le C_{\gamma_0,L}\min\Bigl\{\frac{4}{k^2},\Bigl(1+\sqrt{\tfrac{\min\{\gamma_0,\mu\}}{L}}\Bigr)^{1-k}\Bigr\}\quad(k\ge1),\qquad(88)Lk​≤Cγ0​,L​min{k24​,(1+Lmin{γ0​,μ}​​)1−k}(k≥1),(88)

with Cγ0,L=Lγ0(f(x0)−f(x∗))+L2∥v0−x∗∥2C_{\gamma_0,L}=\frac{L}{\gamma_0}(f(x_0)-f(x^*))+\frac L2\|v_0-x^*\|^2Cγ0​,L​=γ0​L​(f(x0​)−f(x∗))+2L​∥v0​−x∗∥2 (89). The contraction (121) is the core; (87) and (88) are its consequences through Lemma B.2.

Milestones

  1. (120): under the optimality variational inequality for vk+1v_{k+1}vk+1​, the inner-product bound for γk⟨vk+1−vk,vk+1−x⟩\gamma_k\langle v_{k+1}-v_k,v_{k+1}-x\rangleγk​⟨vk+1​−vk​,vk+1​−x⟩.
  2. The difference identity for Lk+1−Lk\mathcal L_{k+1}-\mathcal L_kLk+1​−Lk​ (p. 33).
  3. The one-step estimate (123) (p. 34).
  4. The hhh-term bound: xk+1−yk=αk1+αk(vk+1−vk)x_{k+1}-y_k=\frac{\alpha_k}{1+\alpha_k}(v_{k+1}-v_k)xk+1​−yk​=1+αk​αk​​(vk+1​−vk​) and the hhh-terms of (123) are ≤0\le0≤0 (pp. 34–35).
  5. The ggg-term bound: the ggg-terms of (123) are ≤0\le0≤0 (p. 35).
  6. The bound 1/(1+α0)≤L/γ01/(1+\alpha_0)\le L/\gamma_01/(1+α0​)≤L/γ0​ (p. 21).
  7. Lemma B.2: positivity of γk\gamma_kγk​, the lower bound on αk\alpha_kαk​, and the decay of ∏i<k(1+αi)−1\prod_{i<k}(1+\alpha_i)^{-1}∏i<k​(1+αi​)−1 (pp. 38–39).

Significance

The result. Theorem 7.3 shows that one explicit gradient step on hhh and one proximal step on ggg restricted to QQQ per iteration suffice for acceleration, uniformly in μ≥0\mu\ge0μ≥0: it gives the rate O(L/k2)O(L/k^2)O(L/k2) for convex hhh and the linear rate (1+min⁡{γ0,μ}/L)−k(1+\sqrt{\min\{\gamma_0,\mu\}/L})^{-k}(1+min{γ0​,μ}/L​)−k for strongly convex hhh in one statement, and γ0\gamma_0γ0​ need not know μ\muμ. All iterates xk,yk,vkx_k,y_k,v_kxk​,yk​,vk​ remain in QQQ, so the method applies when ∇h\nabla h∇h exists only on QQQ.

Formalizing it. The theorem is proved on paper, with a short Lyapunov argument; no machine-checked version is known to exist. A formal proof checks the bookkeeping of the argument, including the role of the domain of ggg, and makes the Lyapunov inequality available as a reusable step for other accelerated splitting schemes. The scalar Lemma B.2 is shared with the paper's other schemes (Theorems 5.1, 5.2 and 7.2).

Difficulty

The first-order condition that the paper uses for vk+1v_{k+1}vk+1​, a variational inequality with some pk+1∈∂g(vk+1)p_{k+1}\in\partial g(v_{k+1})pk+1​∈∂g(vk+1​), needs the subdifferential sum rule ∂(g+iQ)=∂g+NQ\partial(g+i_Q)=\partial g+N_Q∂(g+iQ​)=∂g+NQ​, which requires a constraint qualification that (104) does not impose. It fails, for example, when QQQ and dom⁡g\operatorname{dom}gdomg meet in a single boundary point. A proof of the goal therefore cannot simply take such a pk+1p_{k+1}pk+1​ for granted. The second difficulty is bookkeeping: (2) and (4) hold for hhh on QQQ only, so each of the points xk,yk,vk+1,xk+1,x∗x_k,y_k,v_{k+1},x_{k+1},x^*xk​,yk​,vk+1​,xk+1​,x∗ at which they are applied must be shown to lie in QQQ, and the convexity of ggg is used at points that must lie in dom⁡g\operatorname{dom}gdomg. Finally, (87) and (88) require the scalar recursion of Lemma B.2 for the product ∏i<k(1+αi)−1\prod_{i<k}(1+\alpha_i)^{-1}∏i<k​(1+αi​)−1, whose square-root estimates are not routine.

Formalization scope

VVV is a real Hilbert space (InnerProductSpace ℝ V, CompleteSpace V); V∗V^*V∗ is identified with VVV by Riesz. The gradient of hhh is an explicit map gradh with a gradient of hhh within QQQ at every point of QQQ (HasGradientWithinAt). Nothing is assumed about hhh off QQQ, and (4) is not assumed. The extended-valued ggg is encoded by its effective domain D and its real values g : V → ℝ on D. Convexity is ConvexOn ℝ D g, closedness is a closed epigraph, and step 5's argmin over QQQ is a minimiser over Q∩DQ\cap DQ∩D. The scheme is a hypothesis on sequences (IsAFBRun), with αk\alpha_kαk​ any positive solution of the step relation. Integer powers are used for (⋅)−k(\cdot)^{-k}(⋅)−k and (⋅)1−k(\cdot)^{1-k}(⋅)1−k. Lemma B.2's L:=sup⁡kLkL:=\sup_kL_kL:=supk​Lk​ is encoded as any real upper bound of (Lk)(L_k)(Lk​).

Standing and added hypotheses: x∗x^*x∗ minimises fff over Q∩dom⁡gQ\cap\operatorname{dom}gQ∩domg (the paper assumes argmin f≠∅f\ne\emptysetf=∅). γ0>0\gamma_0>0γ0​>0, αk>0\alpha_k>0αk​>0 and L>0L>0L>0 are inputs of Algorithm 4. The hypothesis x0∈dom⁡gx_0\in\operatorname{dom}gx0​∈domg is added to the page's x0∈Qx_0\in Qx0​∈Q, because otherwise L0=Cγ0,L=+∞\mathcal L_0=C_{\gamma_0,L}=+\inftyL0​=Cγ0​,L​=+∞. The goal makes no subgradient or variational-inequality assumption. Milestone (120) carries the variational inequality as an explicit premise. A trivializing formalization would quantify over sequences assumed to satisfy (121), or replace the argmin of step 5 by an arbitrary point of QQQ; the goal quantifies over genuine runs of Algorithm 4, with a genuine minimisation predicate.

A complete development needs elementary Hilbert-space identities, the minimiser inequality for a strongly convex function over a convex set, the descent inequality (4) on a convex set from (3), and the scalar recursion of Lemma B.2. The last two are reusable across the whole series. Contributions to any milestone are welcome.

Selected references

  • H. Luo and L. Chen, From differential equation solvers to accelerated first-order methods for convex optimization, Math. Program. (2022); arXiv:1909.03145v4. https://arxiv.org/abs/1909.03145
  • Yu. Nesterov, Gradient methods for minimizing composite functions, Math. Program. 140 (2013) 125–161. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-012-0629-5
  • A. Beck and M. Teboulle, A fast iterative shrinkage-thresholding algorithm for linear inverse problems, SIAM J. Imaging Sci. 2 (2009) 183–202. https://doi.org/10.1137/080716542
  • P. Tseng, On accelerated proximal gradient methods for convex-concave optimization, technical report, University of Washington, 2008.
  • Yu. Nesterov, Lectures on Convex Optimization, Springer, 2018. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-319-91578-4
9 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Functional AnalysisOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Projected Reflected Gradient Methods for Monotone Variational Inequalities 2: Under Strong Monotonicity the Projected Reflected Gradient Method Converges R-LinearlyResearch Paper

Why projection methods for variational inequalities

A variational inequality asks for a point of a convex set at which a vector field points "inward" against every feasible direction. It is the common form of convex minimization (with FFF a gradient), of saddle-point problems (with FFF the monotone operator of a convex–concave function), of Nash equilibria of convex games, of complementarity problems and of traffic and economic equilibria. Iterative methods that use only evaluations of FFF and projections onto the feasible set are the methods of choice when the problem is large, because each step is cheap.

The classical such method, the projected gradient iteration xn+1=PC(xn−λF(xn))x_{n+1}=P_C(x_n-\lambda F(x_n))xn+1​=PC​(xn​−λF(xn​)), does not converge for merely monotone FFF. Korpelevich's extragradient method (1976) does, at the price of two projections and two evaluations of FFF per step, and it is known to converge R-linearly under strong monotonicity (Tseng 1995, reference [19] of the paper). Popov (1980), Tseng (2000) and Censor–Gibali–Reich (2011) reduced the number of projections or evaluations. Yu. Malitsky's projected reflected gradient method (arXiv:1502.04968, SIAM J. Optim. 25(1), 2015, doi:10.1137/14097238X) uses one projection and one evaluation of FFF per step, evaluating FFF at the reflected point 2xn−xn−12x_n-x_{n-1}2xn​−xn−1​ instead of at xnx_nxn​. This mission formalizes the paper's second main result: under strong monotonicity the method keeps the R-linear rate of the extragradient method.

Setting

Let HHH be a real Hilbert space with inner product ⟨⋅,⋅⟩\langle\cdot,\cdot\rangle⟨⋅,⋅⟩ and norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥, let C⊆HC\subseteq HC⊆H be closed and convex, and let F:H→HF:H\to HF:H→H. The metric projection PC(z)P_C(z)PC​(z) is the unique point of CCC nearest to zzz. The variational inequality (1.1) is

find x∗∈C  such that  ⟨F(x∗), x−x∗⟩ ≥ 0for all x∈C,\text{find } x^*\in C\ \text{ such that }\ \langle F(x^*),\,x-x^*\rangle\ \ge\ 0\quad\text{for all } x\in C,find x∗∈C  such that  ⟨F(x∗),x−x∗⟩ ≥ 0for all x∈C,

with solution set SSS. The paper's standing assumptions for this result are

  • (C1) S≠∅S\neq\emptysetS=∅;
  • (C2*) FFF is strongly monotone with modulus m>0m>0m>0: ⟨F(x)−F(y),x−y⟩≥m∥x−y∥2\langle F(x)-F(y),x-y\rangle\ge m\|x-y\|^2⟨F(x)−F(y),x−y⟩≥m∥x−y∥2 for all x,y∈Hx,y\in Hx,y∈H;
  • (C3) FFF is Lipschitz with constant L>0L>0L>0: ∥F(x)−F(y)∥≤L∥x−y∥\|F(x)-F(y)\|\le L\|x-y\|∥F(x)−F(y)∥≤L∥x−y∥ for all x,y∈Hx,y\in Hx,y∈H.

Algorithm 3.1 chooses x0=y0∈Hx_0=y_0\in Hx0​=y0​∈H and a step λ∈(0,(2−1)/L)\lambda\in\big(0,(\sqrt2-1)/L\big)λ∈(0,(2​−1)/L) and iterates

xn+1=PC(xn−λF(yn)),yn+1=2xn+1−xn.x_{n+1}=P_C\big(x_n-\lambda F(y_n)\big),\qquad y_{n+1}=2x_{n+1}-x_n .xn+1​=PC​(xn​−λF(yn​)),yn+1​=2xn+1​−xn​.

The Lean development names these objects proj, solSet, IsStronglyMonotoneMap, IsLipschitzMap and IsPRGRun in the namespace ProjReflGrad.Linear.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.3 (p. 6)

Under (C1), (C2*), (C3) and 0<λ<(2−1)/L0<\lambda<(\sqrt2-1)/L0<λ<(2​−1)/L, every run of Algorithm 3.1 converges to the solution zzz of (1.1) at least R-linearly:

∃ γ∈(0,1), M>0:∥xn−z∥ ≤ Mγnfor all n≥0.\exists\,\gamma\in(0,1),\ M>0:\qquad \|x_n-z\|\ \le\ M\gamma^n\quad\text{for all } n\ge0 .∃γ∈(0,1), M>0:∥xn​−z∥ ≤ Mγnfor all n≥0.

The goal fixes neither γ\gammaγ nor MMM; the proof produces them from λ\lambdaλ, LLL and mmm, but the theorem asserts only the shape of the rate.

Milestones

In attack order:

  1. Uniqueness (p. 6): under (C2*) the solution set has at most one point.
  2. The identity for ∥yn−z∥2\|y_n-z\|^2∥yn​−z∥2 (p. 6, via Lemma 2.5): ∥yn−z∥2=2∥xn−z∥2−∥xn−1−z∥2+2∥xn−xn−1∥2≥2∥xn−z∥2−∥xn−1−z∥2\|y_n-z\|^2=2\|x_n-z\|^2-\|x_{n-1}-z\|^2+2\|x_n-x_{n-1}\|^2\ge2\|x_n-z\|^2-\|x_{n-1}-z\|^2∥yn​−z∥2=2∥xn​−z∥2−∥xn−1​−z∥2+2∥xn​−xn−1​∥2≥2∥xn​−z∥2−∥xn−1​−z∥2.
  3. (3.8) (p. 7): the strong-monotonicity estimate at yny_nyn​ with a free modulus m1∈(0,m]m_1\in(0,m]m1​∈(0,m].
  4. (3.2) (p. 4): ∥xn+1−z∥2≤∥xn−z∥2−∥xn+1−xn∥2−2λ⟨F(yn),xn+1−z⟩\|x_{n+1}-z\|^2\le\|x_n-z\|^2-\|x_{n+1}-x_n\|^2-2\lambda\langle F(y_n),x_{n+1}-z\rangle∥xn+1​−z∥2≤∥xn​−z∥2−∥xn+1​−xn​∥2−2λ⟨F(yn​),xn+1​−z⟩.
  5. (3.4) (p. 5): 2λ⟨F(yn−1),yn−xn+1⟩≤∥xn+1−xn∥2−∥xn−yn∥2−∥xn+1−yn∥22\lambda\langle F(y_{n-1}),y_n-x_{n+1}\rangle\le\|x_{n+1}-x_n\|^2-\|x_n-y_n\|^2-\|x_{n+1}-y_n\|^22λ⟨F(yn−1​),yn​−xn+1​⟩≤∥xn+1​−xn​∥2−∥xn​−yn​∥2−∥xn+1​−yn​∥2, n≥2n\ge2n≥2.
  6. (3.5) (p. 5): the Lipschitz estimate of 2λ⟨F(yn)−F(yn−1),yn−xn+1⟩2\lambda\langle F(y_n)-F(y_{n-1}),y_n-x_{n+1}\rangle2λ⟨F(yn​)−F(yn−1​),yn​−xn+1​⟩.
  7. (3.9) (p. 7): the two-step recursion an+1+bn+1≤(1−2α)an+αan−1+βbna_{n+1}+b_{n+1}\le(1-2\alpha)a_n+\alpha a_{n-1}+\beta b_nan+1​+bn+1​≤(1−2α)an​+αan−1​+βbn​ in the iterates, with β=max⁡{λL/(1−2λL),12}\beta=\max\{\lambda L/(1-\sqrt2\lambda L),\tfrac12\}β=max{λL/(1−2​λL),21​}.
  8. Lemma 2.8 (p. 3): a nonnegative pair of sequences satisfying that recursion for all α∈(0,α0)\alpha\in(0,\alpha_0)α∈(0,α0​) has an≤γnMa_n\le\gamma^nMan​≤γnM.

Significance

The result. Theorem 3.3 shows that halving the per-step cost of the extragradient method does not cost the linear rate under strong monotonicity. For strongly monotone problems (strongly convex minimization, strongly convex–strongly concave saddle points, strictly monotone games with a quadratic margin) the method therefore reaches accuracy ε\varepsilonε in O(log⁡(1/ε))O(\log(1/\varepsilon))O(log(1/ε)) iterations with one projection each, which matters when projecting onto CCC dominates the cost. The two-step recursion (3.9) and Lemma 2.8 are also a reusable template: the same mechanism gives linear rates for other methods with a memory of one past iterate.

Formalizing it. The theorem is proved in the paper; nothing here is open. No machine-checked proof of it, or of its lemmas, is on the platform. A formal proof needs the projection inequality in a general real Hilbert space, a careful account of the reflected iterate, and a rigorous version of Lemma 2.8, whose printed proof leaves the range of nnn and the positivity of MMM implicit. The deliverable is a checked R-linear rate for a one-projection method in infinite dimension.

Difficulty

The natural first attempt, a contraction ∥xn+1−z∥≤q∥xn−z∥\|x_{n+1}-z\|\le q\|x_n-z\|∥xn+1​−z∥≤q∥xn​−z∥ (Q-linear convergence), is not what the paper proves and is not available: the reflected point yny_nyn​ depends on xn−1x_{n-1}xn−1​, so the error at step n+1n+1n+1 is controlled only by the errors at steps nnn and n−1n-1n−1, together with auxiliary terms ∥xn−yn−1∥2\|x_n-y_{n-1}\|^2∥xn​−yn−1​∥2 and ⟨F(z),xn−1−z⟩\langle F(z),x_{n-1}-z\rangle⟨F(z),xn−1​−z⟩. Strong monotonicity is applied at yny_nyn​, not at xnx_nxn​, and ∥yn−z∥2\|y_n-z\|^2∥yn​−z∥2 can be smaller than ∥xn−z∥2\|x_n-z\|^2∥xn​−z∥2; the lower bound 2∥xn−z∥2−∥xn−1−z∥22\|x_n-z\|^2-\|x_{n-1}-z\|^22∥xn​−z∥2−∥xn−1​−z∥2 may even be negative. The step range λ<(2−1)/L\lambda<(\sqrt2-1)/Lλ<(2​−1)/L is exactly what keeps the coefficients of the Lipschitz error terms below the gain from the projection inequality, and the resulting two-step recursion needs Lemma 2.8, with its choice of γ\gammaγ and δ\deltaδ, to yield a geometric bound.

Formalization scope

  • HHH is a general real inner product space, complete where a projection is used ([CompleteSpace H]); it is never specialized to Rn\mathbb R^nRn.
  • PCP_CPC​ is defined by choice as a nearest point, returning its argument when none exists; every statement using it assumes CCC closed, convex and nonempty (through z∈Cz\in Cz∈C, C≠∅C\neq\emptysetC=∅, or (C1)), so the junk value is never reached.
  • Runs of Algorithm 3.1 are infinite sequences without the stopping rule; a stopped run continues as a constant sequence. x0x_0x0​ is any point of HHH, as in the paper, so statements that need xn−1∈Cx_{n-1}\in Cxn−1​∈C are stated for n≥2n\ge2n≥2.
  • (C2*) and (C3) are required on all of HHH with real constants m>0m>0m>0, L>0L>0L>0 (not LipschitzWith, whose R≥0\mathbb R_{\ge0}R≥0​ constant admits L=0L=0L=0). (C1) stays in the goal: it is the paper's assumption and its only source of C≠∅C\neq\emptysetC=∅.
  • R-linear convergence means domination by MγnM\gamma^nMγn with 0<γ<10<\gamma<10<γ<1 and M>0M>0M>0; a goal allowing γ=1\gamma=1γ=1, γ=0\gamma=0γ=0 or only an O(⋅)O(\cdot)O(⋅) bound would be a different and weaker (or trivially false) statement and is ruled out. The goal does not mention the auxiliary sequences an,bna_n,b_nan​,bn​, the constants β,m1,α0\beta,m_1,\alpha_0β,m1​,α0​, or Lemma 2.8.
  • Departures from the page are recorded in each item's Formalization Note: the ranges n≥1n\ge1n≥1/n≥2n\ge2n≥2, the range n≥1n\ge1n≥1 of (2.1) in Lemma 2.8, the proof's "Lemma 2.1" that means Lemma 2.8, and "m1m_1m1​ arbitrary in (0,m)(0,m)(0,m)" where the argument uses (0,m](0,m](0,m].
  • The projection theorem (existence and characterization of the nearest point) is the published Proved theorem VectorSpaceOpt.min_distance_convex_set, included as a reference. Contributions welcome: proofs of the milestones in any order; Lemma 2.8 and the identity of milestone 2 are self-contained.

Selected references

  • Yu. Malitsky, Projected Reflected Gradient Methods for Monotone Variational Inequalities, SIAM J. Optim. 25(1), 2015. arXiv:1502.04968v1. https://arxiv.org/abs/1502.04968 , https://doi.org/10.1137/14097238X
  • G. M. Korpelevich, The extragradient method for finding saddle points and other problems, Ekonomika i Matematicheskie Metody 12, 747–756, 1976.
  • P. Tseng, On linear convergence of iterative methods for the variational inequality problem, J. Comput. Appl. Math. 60, 237–252, 1995.
  • L. D. Popov, A modification of the Arrow–Hurwicz method for finding saddle points, Math. Notes 28, 845–848, 1980.
  • Y. Censor, A. Gibali, S. Reich, The subgradient extragradient method for solving variational inequalities in Hilbert space, J. Optim. Theory Appl. 148, 318–335, 2011.
12 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Functional AnalysisOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Projected Reflected Gradient Methods for Monotone Variational Inequalities 1: The Projected Reflected Gradient Method Converges Weakly to a SolutionResearch Paper

Motivation

Many problems in optimization, game theory and mechanics come down to a variational inequality: find a point of a convex set at which a given vector field points "inward" against every feasible direction. Constrained convex minimization (where the field is a gradient), saddle-point problems (where it is the gradient of a convex–concave function with one sign flipped), Nash equilibria of convex games and complementarity problems are all of this form. In large-scale and infinite-dimensional settings the methods of choice are projection methods, which use only evaluations of the field and projections onto the feasible set.

The plain projected gradient iteration xn+1=PC(xn−λF(xn))x_{n+1}=P_C(x_n-\lambda F(x_n))xn+1​=PC​(xn​−λF(xn​)) does not converge for merely monotone fields: on a rotation field in the plane it spirals outward for every step size. Korpelevich's extragradient method (1976) repairs this with two field evaluations and two projections per iteration. Later methods (Tseng's forward–backward–forward method, 2000; the subgradient extragradient method of Censor, Gibali and Reich, 2011) reduce the number of projections to one, but still need two evaluations of the field.

Yu. Malitsky's paper (arXiv:1502.04968, SIAM J. Optim. 25(1), 2015, doi:10.1137/14097238X) introduces the projected reflected gradient method, which uses one projection and one field evaluation per iteration, evaluated at a "reflected" point, and proves that it converges weakly under the same assumptions as the extragradient method. This mission formalizes that convergence theorem, Theorem 3.2 of the paper.

Setting

Let HHH be a real Hilbert space with inner product ⟨⋅,⋅⟩\langle\cdot,\cdot\rangle⟨⋅,⋅⟩ and norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥. Let C⊆HC\subseteq HC⊆H be closed and convex, and let F:H→HF:H\to HF:H→H be a mapping. For z∈Hz\in Hz∈H, the metric projection PC(z)P_C(z)PC​(z) is the unique point of CCC nearest to zzz (it exists when CCC is nonempty). The variational inequality (1.1) asks for x∗∈Cx^*\in Cx∗∈C with

⟨F(x∗), x−x∗⟩ ≥ 0for all x∈C,\langle F(x^*),\,x-x^*\rangle\ \ge\ 0\qquad\text{for all }x\in C,⟨F(x∗),x−x∗⟩ ≥ 0for all x∈C,

and SSS denotes its solution set. The standing assumptions are:

  • (C1) SSS is nonempty;
  • (C2) FFF is monotone: ⟨F(x)−F(y),x−y⟩≥0\langle F(x)-F(y),x-y\rangle\ge0⟨F(x)−F(y),x−y⟩≥0 for all x,y∈Hx,y\in Hx,y∈H;
  • (C3) FFF is Lipschitz continuous with a constant L>0L>0L>0: ∥F(x)−F(y)∥≤L∥x−y∥\|F(x)-F(y)\|\le L\|x-y\|∥F(x)−F(y)∥≤L∥x−y∥ for all x,y∈Hx,y\in Hx,y∈H.

Algorithm 3.1 (projected reflected gradient method). Fix a step size λ∈(0,(2−1)/L)\lambda\in\big(0,(\sqrt2-1)/L\big)λ∈(0,(2​−1)/L) and a starting point x0=y0∈Hx_0=y_0\in Hx0​=y0​∈H, and iterate

xn+1=PC(xn−λF(yn)),yn+1=2xn+1−xn.x_{n+1}=P_C\big(x_n-\lambda F(y_n)\big),\qquad y_{n+1}=2x_{n+1}-x_n .xn+1​=PC​(xn​−λF(yn​)),yn+1​=2xn+1​−xn​.

The point yn+1y_{n+1}yn+1​ is the reflection of xnx_nxn​ through xn+1x_{n+1}xn+1​. A sequence (xn)(x_n)(xn​) converges weakly to x∗x^*x∗, written xn⇀x∗x_n\rightharpoonup x^*xn​⇀x∗, if ⟨xn,v⟩→⟨x∗,v⟩\langle x_n,v\rangle\to\langle x^*,v\rangle⟨xn​,v⟩→⟨x∗,v⟩ for every v∈Hv\in Hv∈H.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.2 (p. 5)

Under (C1)–(C3), for 0<λ<(2−1)/L0<\lambda<(\sqrt2-1)/L0<λ<(2​−1)/L and every run of Algorithm 3.1 there is x∗∈Sx^*\in Sx∗∈S with

xn⇀x∗.x_n\rightharpoonup x^* .xn​⇀x∗.

Milestones

In the order the proof uses them:

  1. Lemma 2.1 (i), p. 3: ⟨PMx−x, y−PMx⟩≥0\langle P_Mx-x,\,y-P_Mx\rangle\ge0⟨PM​x−x,y−PM​x⟩≥0 for y∈My\in My∈M (already proved on the platform, referenced).
  2. Lemma 2.1 (ii), p. 3: ∥PMx−y∥2≤∥x−y∥2−∥x−PMx∥2\|P_Mx-y\|^2\le\|x-y\|^2-\|x-P_Mx\|^2∥PM​x−y∥2≤∥x−y∥2−∥x−PM​x∥2 for y∈My\in My∈M.
  3. Lemma 3.1, p. 4: for z∈Sz\in Sz∈S and n≥2n\ge2n≥2,
∥xn+1−z∥2≤∥xn−z∥2−(1−λL(1+2))∥xn−xn−1∥2+λL∥xn−yn−1∥2−(1−2λL)∥xn+1−yn∥2−2λ⟨F(z),yn−z⟩.\|x_{n+1}-z\|^2\le\|x_n-z\|^2-\big(1-\lambda L(1+\sqrt2)\big)\|x_n-x_{n-1}\|^2+\lambda L\|x_n-y_{n-1}\|^2-\big(1-\sqrt2\lambda L\big)\|x_{n+1}-y_n\|^2-2\lambda\langle F(z),y_n-z\rangle .∥xn+1​−z∥2≤∥xn​−z∥2−(1−λL(1+2​))∥xn​−xn−1​∥2+λL∥xn​−yn−1​∥2−(1−2​λL)∥xn+1​−yn​∥2−2λ⟨F(z),yn​−z⟩.
  1. (3.6), p. 5: the descent inequality an+1≤an−bna_{n+1}\le a_n-b_nan+1​≤an​−bn​ with an=∥xn−z∥2+λL∥xn−yn−1∥2+2λ⟨F(z),xn−1−z⟩a_n=\|x_n-z\|^2+\lambda L\|x_n-y_{n-1}\|^2+2\lambda\langle F(z),x_{n-1}-z\ranglean​=∥xn​−z∥2+λL∥xn​−yn−1​∥2+2λ⟨F(z),xn−1​−z⟩ and bn=(1−λL(1+2))∥xn−xn−1∥2b_n=(1-\lambda L(1+\sqrt2))\|x_n-x_{n-1}\|^2bn​=(1−λL(1+2​))∥xn​−xn−1​∥2.
  2. Lemma 2.7, p. 3: nonnegative sequences with an+1≤an−bna_{n+1}\le a_n-b_nan+1​≤an​−bn​ have (an)(a_n)(an​) bounded and bn→0b_n\to0bn​→0.
  3. Proof of Theorem 3.2, pp. 5–6: (xn)(x_n)(xn​) is bounded, ∥xn+1−xn∥→0\|x_{n+1}-x_n\|\to0∥xn+1​−xn​∥→0 and ∥xn+1−yn∥→0\|x_{n+1}-y_n\|\to0∥xn+1​−yn​∥→0.
  4. Lemma 2.2 (Minty), p. 3: for continuous monotone FFF, x∗∈Sx^*\in Sx∗∈S iff x∗∈Cx^*\in Cx∗∈C and ⟨F(y),y−x∗⟩≥0\langle F(y),y-x^*\rangle\ge0⟨F(y),y−x∗⟩≥0 for all y∈Cy\in Cy∈C.
  5. (3.7), p. 6: every weak cluster point of (xn)(x_n)(xn​) lies in SSS.
  6. Proof of Theorem 3.2, p. 6: for each z∈Sz\in Sz∈S, ∥xn−z∥2+2λ⟨F(z),xn−1−z⟩\|x_n-z\|^2+2\lambda\langle F(z),x_{n-1}-z\rangle∥xn​−z∥2+2λ⟨F(z),xn−1​−z⟩ converges.
  7. Lemma 2.3 (Opial), p. 3: if xn⇀xx_n\rightharpoonup xxn​⇀x and y≠xy\ne xy=x, then lim inf⁡∥xn−x∥<lim inf⁡∥xn−y∥\liminf\|x_n-x\|<\liminf\|x_n-y\|liminf∥xn​−x∥<liminf∥xn​−y∥.

Companion items, not milestones: the defined projection is the metric projection (so runs of Algorithm 3.1 exist from every starting point), Remark 2.1 (SSS is closed and convex), and the characterization of SSS as the zeros of the projected residual r(x,y)=∥y−PC(x−λF(y))∥+∥x−y∥r(x,y)=\|y-P_C(x-\lambda F(y))\|+\|x-y\|r(x,y)=∥y−PC​(x−λF(y))∥+∥x−y∥ (§3, p. 4).

Significance

The result. Theorem 3.2 shows that a monotone Lipschitz variational inequality in Hilbert space can be solved by an iteration costing one projection and one evaluation of FFF per step, the minimum for a projection method, with no knowledge beyond the Lipschitz constant. This halves the cost of each iteration relative to the extragradient method when evaluating FFF is expensive, and keeps the cost of projections at one when projecting onto CCC is expensive. The method and its analysis became the basis for several later algorithms, including the adaptive variant in §4 of the same paper and the golden ratio algorithm of Malitsky (2020).

Formalizing it. The theorem is proved in the paper; no machine-checked proof is known to exist. The formal development needs, beyond the main argument, a usable library of facts about projections onto closed convex sets in Hilbert space, weak convergence of sequences (boundedness of weakly convergent sequences, weak sequential compactness of bounded sets) and Opial's property. These are reused by every weak-convergence proof for splitting and projection methods, and several companion missions of this series and of related papers rely on the same facts.

Difficulty

The naive Lyapunov function ∥xn−z∥2\|x_n-z\|^2∥xn​−z∥2 is not monotone along the iteration: because FFF is evaluated at the reflected point yny_nyn​ rather than at xnx_nxn​, the cross terms do not cancel as they do for the extragradient method. The quantity that does decrease (milestones 3–4) carries extra terms, and the step bound (2−1)/L(\sqrt2-1)/L(2​−1)/L is what the decrease requires. As a consequence, ∥xn−z∥\|x_n-z\|∥xn​−z∥ itself is not known to converge, so the standard Opial lemma ("if ∥xn−z∥\|x_n-z\|∥xn​−z∥ converges for every z∈Sz\in Sz∈S and all weak cluster points lie in SSS, then xnx_nxn​ converges weakly") does not apply directly; the uniqueness of the weak cluster point has to be argued with the perturbed quantity and Opial's inequality. In infinite dimension, the weak cluster point step also needs weak sequential compactness of bounded sets, which is not norm compactness.

Formalization scope

  • HHH is an arbitrary real inner product space with [CompleteSpace H] in every statement that needs completeness; it is never specialised to Rn\mathbb R^nRn, where weak and norm convergence coincide.
  • Weak convergence is stated elementarily: ⟨xn,v⟩→⟨x∗,v⟩\langle x_n,v\rangle\to\langle x^*,v\rangle⟨xn​,v⟩→⟨x∗,v⟩ for every v∈Hv\in Hv∈H. Subsequences are x∘φx\circ\varphix∘φ with φ\varphiφ strictly increasing.
  • The projection PC(z)P_C(z)PC​(z) is defined by choice as a nearest point, with the junk value zzz when none exists. Every statement that uses it assumes CCC closed, convex and nonempty (directly or through S≠∅S\ne\emptysetS=∅ or z∈Sz\in Sz∈S), and a companion item certifies that it is then the metric projection.
  • (C2) and (C3) are imposed on all of HHH, as in the paper; LLL is a real number with L>0L>0L>0, and the step range 0<λ<(2−1)/L0<\lambda<(\sqrt2-1)/L0<λ<(2​−1)/L is strict on both sides.
  • Runs of Algorithm 3.1 carry no stopping rule: a run reaching a solution xn=yn∈Sx_n=y_n\in Sxn​=yn​∈S stays constant, so infinite runs subsume stopped ones. The starting point x0x_0x0​ is any point of HHH, not necessarily in CCC; for this reason Lemma 3.1 and (3.6) are stated for n≥2n\ge2n≥2, which is the range the proof of Theorem 3.2 uses.
  • Opial's inequality is stated with liminfs in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞], where they are always defined.
  • A trivializing formalization is ruled out: the goal assumes exactly (C1)–(C3), closedness and convexity of CCC and the step range, and concludes weak convergence to a point of SSS; it does not assume boundedness of the iterates, a starting point in CCC, finite dimension, or any of the intermediate estimates.

Contributions welcome: proofs of the milestones in any order; general Hilbert-space lemmas (boundedness of weakly convergent sequences via the uniform boundedness principle, weak sequential compactness of bounded sets, Opial's inequality) are useful well beyond this mission.

Selected references

  • Yu. Malitsky, Projected reflected gradient methods for monotone variational inequalities, SIAM J. Optim. 25(1) (2015), 502–520. arXiv:1502.04968, doi:10.1137/14097238X
  • G. M. Korpelevich, The extragradient method for finding saddle points and other problems, Ekonomika i Matematicheskie Metody 12 (1976), 747–756.
  • P. Tseng, A modified forward-backward splitting method for maximal monotone mappings, SIAM J. Control Optim. 38(2) (2000), 431–446. doi:10.1137/S0363012998338806
  • Y. Censor, A. Gibali, S. Reich, The subgradient extragradient method for solving variational inequalities in Hilbert space, J. Optim. Theory Appl. 148 (2011), 318–335. doi:10.1007/s10957-010-9757-3
  • Z. Opial, Weak convergence of the sequence of successive approximations for nonexpansive mappings, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 73 (1967), 591–597. doi:10.1090/S0002-9904-1967-11761-0
  • H. H. Bauschke, P. L. Combettes, Convex Analysis and Monotone Operator Theory in Hilbert Spaces, 2nd ed., Springer, 2017. doi:10.1007/978-3-319-48311-5
12 thms3 active usersReviewed
Linear algebraMachine LearningProbability+2·Captain: mikedeng1

An Introduction to Matrix Concentration Inequalities III: A Matrix Sampling Estimator Satisfies E‖R̄ₙ − B‖ ≤ √(2m₂(R)log(d₁ + d₂)/n) + 2L log(d₁ + d₂)/(3n)Textbook

Motivation

Matrix approximation replaces a large or complicated matrix with a random matrix that is easier to store or compute. Averaging independent realizations improves accuracy while retaining the structure of each realization. Examples in Tropp's monograph include sparse approximations and randomized matrix products. The practical question is how the number of samples, the size of one sample, and its second moment control the spectral norm error. Tropp, §6.2

The book proves a matrix Bernstein inequality in Theorem 6.1.1, then applies it to an empirical matrix average in Corollary 6.2.1. Theorem 6.1.1 is already posed as TroppMatrixConcentration.matrix_bernstein on Prove2Me and is currently Open. This mission records the application with its own hypotheses and constants. The capstone concerns the estimator that a reader would construct, rather than a sum of abstract centered summands. Tropp, §§6.1–6.2

Setting

Let BBB be a fixed complex d1×d2d_1\times d_2d1​×d2​ matrix. A sample matrix RRR has the same size, has expectation BBB, and has spectral norm at most LLL almost surely. The equality ER=B\mathbb ER=BER=B makes one sample an unbiased estimate of BBB. The almost-sure bound limits the size of every sample except on a probability-zero set. The dimensions d1,d2d_1,d_2d1​,d2​ are positive integers, and nnn is a positive sample count.

Take independent copies R1,…,RnR_1,\ldots,R_nR1​,…,Rn​ with the distribution of RRR. Their matrix sampling estimator is

R‾n=1n∑k=1nRk.\overline R_n=\frac1n\sum_{k=1}^nR_k.Rn​=n1​k=1∑n​Rk​.

For any rectangular matrix AAA, A∗A^*A∗ denotes its conjugate transpose and ∥A∥\|A\|∥A∥ its spectral norm. The per-sample second moment is

m2(R)=max⁡{∥E(RR∗)∥,∥E(R∗R)∥}.m_2(R)=\max\{\|\mathbb E(RR^*)\|,\|\mathbb E(R^*R)\|\}.m2​(R)=max{∥E(RR∗)∥,∥E(R∗R)∥}.

Both terms matter for a rectangular matrix: RR∗RR^*RR∗ and R∗RR^*RR∗R act on different coordinate spaces. All expectations of matrices are entrywise expectations, represented by Bochner integrals in Lean. The almost-sure norm bound guarantees the moments used here are finite. Tropp, equations (6.2.4)–(6.2.6)

Formalization targets

Empirical matrix approximation

Corollary 6.2.1 gives an expectation estimate and a tail estimate for the same estimator. For every real t≥0t\ge0t≥0,

E∥R‾n−B∥≤2m2(R)log⁡(d1+d2)n+2Llog⁡(d1+d2)3n,\mathbb E\|\overline R_n-B\|\le \sqrt{\frac{2m_2(R)\log(d_1+d_2)}{n}}+ \frac{2L\log(d_1+d_2)}{3n},E∥Rn​−B∥≤n2m2​(R)log(d1​+d2​)​​+3n2Llog(d1​+d2​)​, P{∥R‾n−B∥≥t}≤(d1+d2)exp⁡(−nt2/2m2(R)+2Lt/3).\mathbb P\{\|\overline R_n-B\|\ge t\}\le (d_1+d_2)\exp\left(\frac{-nt^2/2}{m_2(R)+2Lt/3}\right).P{∥Rn​−B∥≥t}≤(d1​+d2​)exp(m2​(R)+2Lt/3−nt2/2​).

The goal includes both bounds. The expectation estimate controls average error; the tail estimate controls the chance of an error above a chosen threshold. The dimension enters only through log⁡(d1+d2)\log(d_1+d_2)log(d1​+d2​) in the expectation bound and the factor d1+d2d_1+d_2d1​+d2​ in the tail bound. These are the book's constants, including the factors 222 and 333 in the linear terms. Tropp, Corollary 6.2.1, p. 81

Supporting statements

The milestone list follows Corollary 6.1.2 for uncentered summands, the bound ∥n−1(Rk−B)∥≤2L/n\|n^{-1}(R_k-B)\|\le2L/n∥n−1(Rk​−B)∥≤2L/n, and the variance estimate v(R‾n−B)≤m2(R)/nv(\overline R_n-B)\le m_2(R)/nv(Rn​−B)≤m2​(R)/n. Equation (6.2.7) is a companion: a stated lower bound on nnn implies E∥R‾n−B∥≤2ε\mathbb E\|\overline R_n-B\|\le2\varepsilonE∥Rn​−B∥≤2ε for ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0. Tropp, pp. 77, 82

Significance

The result turns a bound on one random matrix into a quantitative guarantee for an empirical approximation. It lets a user choose a sample count for a target error and evaluate both average error and failure probability. The same framework is instantiated later in the monograph for matrix sparsification and multiplication; those applications depend on controlling LLL and m2(R)m_2(R)m2​(R) for their particular sampling laws. Tropp, §§6.2–6.4

This is a known mathematical result proved in the book. Its Lean statement is an open formalization target. The mission adds a reusable empirical-mean definition and application statements built on the already published matrix spectral norm and rectangular second-moment definitions. A proof of the general matrix Bernstein theorem remains separate; the mission can draw on it when that platform theorem is proved.

Difficulty

The estimator error is a centered sum, but the sampling assumptions are given for an uncentered random matrix RRR. Bounding the centered summands changes the uniform bound from LLL to 2L/n2L/n2L/n. The variance parameter must be related to the second moment of one uncentered sample, with the correct 1/n1/n1/n scaling. Dropping the common-distribution condition would leave no relation between the samples' second moments and m2(R)m_2(R)m2​(R). Applying scalar concentration to entries would not directly give the stated spectral norm bound or its dimension dependence. Tropp, proof of Corollary 6.2.1, p. 82

Formalization scope

Matrices are Matrix (Fin d₁) (Fin d₂) ℂ. The spectral norm and rectSecondMoment are imported from tc's published TroppMatrixConcentration definitions. An arbitrary probability space carries a measurable reference matrix R0R_0R0​ and a finite family RkR_kRk​; iIndepFun expresses independence and IdentDistrib expresses equality in law with R0R_0R0​. The estimator is the finite sum scaled by n−1n^{-1}n−1. No particular sampling scheme or deterministic choice of RRR is fixed: the formal goal requires only the source's unbiasedness and boundedness conditions.

The Lean statements explicitly require d1,d2≥1d_1,d_2\ge1d1​,d2​≥1, n>0n>0n>0, measurability, and the almost-sure form of ∥R∥≤L\|R\|\le L∥R∥≤L. These make the logarithm and inverse sample count meaningful and make the random matrix laws well behaved. For the uncentered Bernstein corollary, integrability of each SkS_kSk​ is explicit because a bounded deviation from an unspecified mean alone does not establish that the mean exists. The goal also asserts integrability of its error norm, preventing a Bochner integral from silently taking Lean's default value for a nonintegrable function. The bound on RRR supplies that integrability. When the denominator in a tail formula is zero, the displayed total real division gives a loose bound at the degenerate case; the source's probabilistic claim remains valid.

Contributions that formalize the centered-summand calculation, the variance estimate, or the transfer from the general matrix Bernstein theorem are within scope. The imported matrix and probability definitions are reusable in other matrix concentration missions. The local empirical-mean definition is reusable whenever a matrix estimator averages finitely many random samples.

Selected references

  • Joel A. Tropp, An Introduction to Matrix Concentration Inequalities, Foundations and Trends in Machine Learning 8(1–2), 2015, arXiv:1501.01571v1, especially §§6.1–6.4.
7 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Linear algebraProbabilityRandom Matrix Theory·Captain: mikedeng1

An Introduction to Matrix Concentration Inequalities II: A Random Row-and-Column Submatrix Z = PBR Satisfies E‖Z‖² ≤ 3(p/d)(r/n)‖B‖² Plus Logarithmic Row, Column and Entry TermsTextbook

Motivation and context

Large matrices are often reduced by retaining only some rows or columns. The reduced matrix is cheaper to store and apply, but its spectral norm can be distorted by a single unusually large row, column, or entry. A useful estimate must show both the average effect of sampling and the cost of these local concentrations. In §5.2 of Tropp's monograph, matrix Chernoff inequalities give numerical estimates for independently sampled columns and for independently sampled rows and columns. The latter is the capstone of this mission.

The general matrix Chernoff inequality, Theorem 5.1.1, is already an Open goal in tc's Chapter 5 mission on Prove2Me. The intrinsic-dimension Chernoff inequality, Theorem 7.2.1, is likewise Open in tc's Chapter 7 mission. This mission concerns the application statements that those chapter missions have not posed: the numerical bound (5.2.2), its three displayed intermediate estimates, and companion consequences in §§5.1.1, 5.2.1 and 7.2.2. The motivation for choosing this target is that it connects a general concentration result to a concrete random matrix model; its terms can be read directly from a deterministic input matrix.

Setting

Fix a complex matrix B∈Cd×nB\in\mathbb C^{d\times n}B∈Cd×n with d,n≥1d,n\ge1d,n≥1. For each row jjj, let δj\delta_jδj​ equal one when that row is retained and zero otherwise. For each column kkk, let ξk\xi_kξk​ have the analogous meaning. The whole family is independent, with δj∼Bernoulli⁡(p/d)\delta_j\sim\operatorname{Bernoulli}(p/d)δj​∼Bernoulli(p/d) and ξk∼Bernoulli⁡(r/n)\xi_k\sim\operatorname{Bernoulli}(r/n)ξk​∼Bernoulli(r/n), where 0≤p≤d0\le p\le d0≤p≤d and 0≤r≤n0\le r\le n0≤r≤n. Thus ppp and rrr are the expected numbers of retained rows and columns. Put

P=diag⁡(δ1,…,δd),R=diag⁡(ξ1,…,ξn),Z=PBR.P=\operatorname{diag}(\delta_1,\ldots,\delta_d),\qquad R=\operatorname{diag}(\xi_1,\ldots,\xi_n),\qquad Z=PBR.P=diag(δ1​,…,δd​),R=diag(ξ1​,…,ξn​),Z=PBR.

The zeros remain in the matrix: ZZZ has the same dimensions as BBB, but entries in discarded rows or columns vanish. Write bj:b_{j:}bj:​ for row jjj, b:kb_{:k}b:k​ for column kkk, and bjkb_{jk}bjk​ for an entry. Their vector norms are Euclidean, while ∥B∥\|B\|∥B∥ and ∥Z∥\|Z\|∥Z∥ denote the spectral operator norm. The source uses E\mathbb EE for expectation over the selections. Its maxima range over all rows, columns or entries of BBB, so a highly uneven matrix is distinguished from one whose mass is spread evenly.

The first milestone is the streamlined upper matrix Chernoff expectation bound. For a finite independent family of positive semidefinite Hermitian matrices XkX_kXk​ with eigenvalues at most LLL, let Y=∑kXkY=\sum_kX_kY=∑k​Xk​ and μmax⁡=λmax⁡(EY)\mu_{\max}=\lambda_{\max}(\mathbb EY)μmax​=λmax​(EY). The bound uses the book's numerical constant 1.721.721.72. The subsequent milestones specialize this setting to the row and column selectors above. A separate companion states the lower bound with 0.630.630.63 and the two weakened tail inequalities of §5.1.1.

Formalization targets

The goal is the exact displayed estimate (5.2.2), with the book's rounded constants:

E∥PBR∥2≤3pdrn∥B∥2+2plog⁡ddmax⁡k∥b:k∥2+2rlog⁡nnmax⁡j∥bj:∥2+(log⁡d)(log⁡n)max⁡j,k∣bjk∣2.\begin{aligned} \mathbb E\|PBR\|^2\le{}&3\frac pd\frac rn\|B\|^2 +2\frac{p\log d}{d}\max_k\|b_{:k}\|^2\\ &+2\frac{r\log n}{n}\max_j\|b_{j:}\|^2 +(\log d)(\log n)\max_{j,k}|b_{jk}|^2. \end{aligned}E∥PBR∥2≤​3dp​nr​∥B∥2+2dplogd​kmax​∥b:k​∥2+2nrlogn​jmax​∥bj:​∥2+(logd)(logn)j,kmax​∣bjk​∣2.​

Its milestone chain is (5.1.8), followed by (5.2.3), (5.2.4), and (5.2.5). These are the claims the text places immediately before the final estimate. They bound, respectively, the first column-selection stage, the norm of the row-selected matrix, and the largest column norm after row selection. The companion (5.2.1) gives both the top and least squared singular-value bounds for column selection alone. The companion from §7.2.2 replaces log⁡d\log dlogd by log⁡(2srank⁡(B))\log(2\operatorname{srank}(B))log(2srank(B)), where srank⁡(B)=∥B∥F2/∥B∥2\operatorname{srank}(B)=\|B\|_F^2/\|B\|^2srank(B)=∥B∥F2​/∥B∥2 is stable rank.

Significance

The goal separates four sources of size in a sampled matrix. The first term scales the squared spectral norm by the expected row and column retention fractions. The remaining terms record concentrations in a column, a row, and an individual entry. Consequently, the estimate can be evaluated from BBB and the two sampling rates without specifying a distribution for BBB itself. It is an expectation bound, not a claim that every realized submatrix is close to BBB.

The formal development would make the application layer of Tropp's Chapter 5 available alongside tc's general, currently Open matrix Chernoff theorem. A proof of that general theorem does not itself identify the random projectors, their joint independence, or the deterministic quantities on the right side of (5.2.2). The stable-rank companion also links the Chapter 7 notion of intrinsic dimension to a concrete rectangular matrix statistic. Both the chapter's general theorems and this mission's statements remain Open on the platform; none is being presented as already machine proved. Tropp, §§5.2 and 7.2.2 gives the mathematical results.

Difficulty

Sampling both rows and columns introduces two interacting random projectors. Merely applying a one-stage column estimate to BBB leaves the row selection uncontrolled; merely applying a one-stage row estimate leaves the sampled column norms random. The two families must be independent of each other as well as independent internally. That distinction is substantial: separate independence claims for the row family and the column family do not imply independence between PPP and RRR. The final estimate must also retain the book's exact 333 and 222 coefficients rather than replacing the right side by an unspecified constant times a simpler expression.

Formalization scope

Matrices are Matrix (Fin d) (Fin n) ℂ, matching the book's general complex-matrix convention. The spectral norm, extreme eigenvalues, Borel measurable matrix space, and intrinsic dimension come from tc's published definitions, which this mission references. Random selectors are measurable real-valued functions on a probability space; their Bernoulli law specifies almost-sure values zero or one and the probability of one. The row and column selectors form one jointly independent family. Products with diagonal selector matrices define PBPBPB, BRBRBR and PBRPBRPBR; a deterministic diagonal or an unconstrained zero-one function would not be the sampled model.

Every sampling rate is within its Bernoulli domain. Nonzero dimensions keep the maxima over finite, inhabited sets and give the logarithms their intended arguments. Lean's Bochner integral otherwise returns zero on a nonintegrable function; each expectation inequality records integrability in its conclusion, which follows from measurable, bounded Bernoulli selectors and Tropp's standing regularity convention in §2.2.1. The maxima of column, row, and entry magnitudes are real finite suprema, equal to maxima for these finite nonempty index sets. The intrinsic-dimension identity assumes p>0p>0p>0 and B≠0B\ne0B=0 for scale invariance; the final stable-rank bound itself includes zero sampling and the zero matrix.

The definitions of Bernoulli selection, random diagonal projections, sampled matrices, finite norm maxima and stable rank are reusable outside this mission. Contributions can address their structural identities, integrability, the four milestones, the goal, or the independent column-selection companions. The book's constants 1.721.721.72 and 0.630.630.63 are retained as decimals; 333 and 222 are the rounded coefficients printed in (5.2.2), as the text explains on p. 66.

Selected references

  • Joel A. Tropp, An Introduction to Matrix Concentration Inequalities, Foundations and Trends in Machine Learning 8(1–2), 2015, arXiv:1501.01571v1, §§2.1, 2.2, 5.1, 5.2, 7.2.
  • Joel A. Tropp, An Introduction to Matrix Concentration Inequalities, Foundations and Trends in Machine Learning 8(1–2), 2015, DOI:10.1561/2200000048. The formalization cites the pinned arXiv version above for page and equation indices.
11 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

A Differential Equation for Modeling Nesterov's Accelerated Gradient Method: Theory and Insights III: The Generalized Nesterov Scheme Has f(x_k) − f⋆ ≤ (r − 1)²‖x₀ − x⋆‖²/(2s(k + r − 2)²)Research Paper

Motivation

Nesterov's accelerated gradient method minimizes a smooth convex function with an error of order 1/k21/k^21/k2 after kkk steps, against 1/k1/k1/k for plain gradient descent, and this rate is optimal among first-order methods. Its momentum coefficient (k−1)/(k+2)(k-1)/(k+2)(k−1)/(k+2) has long been regarded as delicate. Su, Boyd and Candès (arXiv:1503.01243, J. Mach. Learn. Res. 17(153), 2016) model the method by the ordinary differential equation X¨+3tX˙+∇f(X)=0\ddot X+\frac3t\dot X+\nabla f(X)=0X¨+t3​X˙+∇f(X)=0 and ask what the constant 333 means. Their §4 replaces 333 by a parameter rrr, in the ODE and in the algorithm, and finds a threshold: for r≥3r\ge3r≥3 the inverse-quadratic rate survives, for r<3r<3r<3 it can fail.

This mission formalizes the discrete half of the "high friction" case r>3r>3r>3: Theorem 6 of the paper, which gives the O(1/k2)O(1/k^2)O(1/k2) rate and a weighted summability bound for the generalized Nesterov scheme in the composite (proximal) setting of Beck and Teboulle (SIAM J. Imaging Sci. 2009).

Timeline. Nesterov (1983) introduced the method with momentum (k−1)/(k+2)(k-1)/(k+2)(k−1)/(k+2). Beck and Teboulle (2009) extended it to composite objectives g+hg+hg+h (FISTA). Su, Boyd and Candès (arXiv 2014, JMLR 2016) proposed the parameter rrr and proved Theorem 6. Chambolle and Dossal (J. Optim. Theory Appl. 2015) and Attouch and Peypouquet (SIAM J. Optim. 2016) then used the same family with r>3r>3r>3 to prove weak convergence of the iterates and the faster o(1/k2)o(1/k^2)o(1/k2) rate.

Setting

Let H\mathcal HH be a real Hilbert space. The objective is f=g+hf=g+hf=g+h, where

  1. g:H→Rg:\mathcal H\to\mathbb Rg:H→R belongs to FL\mathcal F_LFL​: it is convex and continuously differentiable, and its gradient is LLL-Lipschitz for some L>0L>0L>0;
  2. h:H→R∪{+∞}h:\mathcal H\to\mathbb R\cup\{+\infty\}h:H→R∪{+∞} is proper, lower semicontinuous and convex (it may take the value +∞+\infty+∞, encoding constraints).

A minimizer x⋆x^\starx⋆ of fff is assumed to exist, and f⋆=f(x⋆)f^\star=f(x^\star)f⋆=f(x⋆). For a step size s>0s>0s>0, the proximal map is prox⁡sh(u)=argmin⁡z(∥z−u∥2/(2s)+h(z))\operatorname{prox}_{sh}(u)=\operatorname{argmin}_z\big(\|z-u\|^2/(2s)+h(z)\big)proxsh​(u)=argminz​(∥z−u∥2/(2s)+h(z)), and the proximal subgradient is

Gs(x)=x−prox⁡sh(x−s∇g(x))s.G_s(x)=\frac{x-\operatorname{prox}_{sh}\big(x-s\nabla g(x)\big)}{s}.Gs​(x)=sx−proxsh​(x−s∇g(x))​.

Given rrr, the generalized Nesterov scheme (19) produces (xk)(x_k)(xk​) and (yk)(y_k)(yk​) from a starting point x0x_0x0​ by y0=x0y_0=x_0y0​=x0​ and, for k≥1k\ge1k≥1,

xk=yk−1−sGs(yk−1),yk=xk+k−1k+r−1 (xk−xk−1).x_k=y_{k-1}-sG_s(y_{k-1}),\qquad y_k=x_k+\frac{k-1}{k+r-1}\,(x_k-x_{k-1}).xk​=yk−1​−sGs​(yk−1​),yk​=xk​+k+r−1k−1​(xk​−xk−1​).

For r=3r=3r=3 this is Nesterov's method (FISTA when h≠0h\neq0h=0). The proof uses the auxiliary points zk=k+r−1r−1yk−kr−1xkz_k=\frac{k+r-1}{r-1}y_k-\frac{k}{r-1}x_kzk​=r−1k+r−1​yk​−r−1k​xk​ and the discrete energy

E(k)=2(k+r−2)2sr−1(f(xk)−f⋆)+(r−1)∥zk−x⋆∥2.\mathcal E(k)=\frac{2(k+r-2)^2s}{r-1}\big(f(x_k)-f^\star\big)+(r-1)\|z_k-x^\star\|^2 .E(k)=r−12(k+r−2)2s​(f(xk​)−f⋆)+(r−1)∥zk​−x⋆∥2.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 6 (p. 13)

For r>3r>3r>3 and 0<s≤1/L0<s\le1/L0<s≤1/L, for every k≥1k\ge1k≥1,

f(xk)−f⋆≤(r−1)2∥x0−x⋆∥22s(k+r−2)2,∑k=1∞(k+r−1)(f(xk)−f⋆)≤(r−1)2∥x0−x⋆∥22s(r−3).f(x_k)-f^\star\le\frac{(r-1)^2\|x_0-x^\star\|^2}{2s(k+r-2)^2},\qquad \sum_{k=1}^{\infty}(k+r-1)\big(f(x_k)-f^\star\big)\le\frac{(r-1)^2\|x_0-x^\star\|^2}{2s(r-3)} .f(xk​)−f⋆≤2s(k+r−2)2(r−1)2∥x0​−x⋆∥2​,k=1∑∞​(k+r−1)(f(xk​)−f⋆)≤2s(r−3)(r−1)2∥x0​−x⋆∥2​.

The two bounds are proved together and stated as one theorem, as on the page.

Milestones (pp. 14–15)

  1. The basic proximal-gradient inequality (22): f(y−sGs(y))≤f(x)+Gs(y)⊤(y−x)−s2∥Gs(y)∥2f(y-sG_s(y))\le f(x)+G_s(y)^\top(y-x)-\frac s2\|G_s(y)\|^2f(y−sGs​(y))≤f(x)+Gs​(y)⊤(y−x)−2s​∥Gs​(y)∥2 for all x,yx,yx,y when s≤1/Ls\le1/Ls≤1/L. This is already proved on the platform and enters as a reference.
  2. The identity zk−1−s(k+r−2)Gs(yk−1)/(r−1)=zkz_{k-1}-s(k+r-2)G_s(y_{k-1})/(r-1)=z_kzk−1​−s(k+r−2)Gs​(yk−1​)/(r−1)=zk​.
  3. The one-step inequality obtained from (22) at x=xk−1x=x_{k-1}x=xk−1​ and at x=x⋆x=x^\starx=x⋆.
  4. The energy step (20): E(k)+2s[(r−3)(k+r−2)+1]r−1(f(xk−1)−f⋆)≤E(k−1)\mathcal E(k)+\frac{2s[(r-3)(k+r-2)+1]}{r-1}(f(x_{k-1})-f^\star)\le\mathcal E(k-1)E(k)+r−12s[(r−3)(k+r−2)+1]​(f(xk−1​)−f⋆)≤E(k−1).
  5. The summed form (21): E(k)+∑i=1k−12s[(r−3)(i+r−1)+1]r−1(f(xi)−f⋆)≤(r−1)∥x0−x⋆∥2\mathcal E(k)+\sum_{i=1}^{k-1}\frac{2s[(r-3)(i+r-1)+1]}{r-1}(f(x_i)-f^\star)\le(r-1)\|x_0-x^\star\|^2E(k)+∑i=1k−1​r−12s[(r−3)(i+r−1)+1]​(f(xi​)−f⋆)≤(r−1)∥x0​−x⋆∥2.

Significance

The result shows that the constant 333 in Nesterov's momentum is a threshold, not a tuned value: every larger rrr keeps the O(1/k2)O(1/k^2)O(1/k2) guarantee, with an explicit constant (r−1)2/2(r-1)^2/2(r−1)2/2. The second bound does not follow from the first. It says the gap cannot stay of order 1/k21/k^21/k2 along any set of indices of positive density, and it is the starting point of the later o(1/k2)o(1/k^2)o(1/k2) and iterate-convergence results for r>3r>3r>3.

On the formal side, the platform already has the basic inequality (22) and a version of the energy argument with the weaker coefficient 2s(r−3)k/(r−1)2s(r-3)k/(r-1)2s(r−3)k/(r−1), under the strict step condition sL<1sL<1sL<1 and with bounds in terms of E(1)\mathcal E(1)E(1). This mission adds the paper's sharper energy decrease (20), allows the step s=1/Ls=1/Ls=1/L, and expresses both bounds through the initial distance ∥x0−x⋆∥\|x_0-x^\star\|∥x0​−x⋆∥ alone, which requires the first step of the scheme to be part of the hypotheses. To our knowledge no machine-checked proof of Theorem 6 exists.

Difficulty

The argument is elementary in structure but exact in its constants. The obvious route, a Lyapunov energy that decreases, gives a decrease coefficient of order kkk; obtaining the paper's coefficient (r−3)(k+r−2)+1(r-3)(k+r-2)+1(r−3)(k+r−2)+1 requires the precise algebra relating yk−1y_{k-1}yk−1​, xk−1x_{k-1}xk−1​, xkx_kxk​ and zkz_kzk​. The objective takes values in R∪{+∞}\mathbb R\cup\{+\infty\}R∪{+∞}, so every manipulation must respect extended-real arithmetic: x0x_0x0​ itself may lie outside the domain of hhh, and the passage from (20) to (21) cancels a term f(x0)−f⋆f(x_0)-f^\starf(x0​)−f⋆ that may be infinite. The first iterate must be tracked separately, because the bound is in terms of x0x_0x0​ while the momentum formula is only meaningful from k=1k=1k=1.

Formalization scope

The Lean development works in a real Hilbert space H (InnerProductSpace ℝ H, CompleteSpace H); ℝⁿ is a special case. It reuses three published items: ThreeOpSplitting.ConvexRates.Problem (IsProperClosedConvex, IsProx), NesterovFB.Rates.Algorithm (the objective theta, the extrapolation extrap, gradMap =Gs=G_s=Gs​, zSeq =zk=z_k=zk​ and energy =E=\mathcal E=E, with the algorithm's parameter α\alphaα set to rrr), and the proved theorem NesterovFB.Rates.eq9_prox_grad_inequality, which is (22). A new definition NesterovODE.GenScheme.IsGenNesterovRun states (19) for every k≥0k\ge0k≥0, the case k=0k=0k=0 being the first step x1=prox⁡sh(x0−s∇g(x0))x_1=\operatorname{prox}_{sh}(x_0-s\nabla g(x_0))x1​=proxsh​(x0​−s∇g(x0​)).

Conventions committed to:

  • Values of fff are in EReal, and real coefficients enter through the coercion. f(xk)f(x_k)f(xk​) is finite for k≥1k\ge1k≥1, and so is f⋆f^\starf⋆.
  • hhh is assumed proper and lower semicontinuous in addition to convex, so that the argmin defining GsG_sGs​ exists; the proximal map is any P with IsProx s h P.
  • s≤1/Ls\le1/Ls≤1/L is written s * L ≤ 1, with 0 < L.
  • r>3r>3r>3, the standing assumption of §4.1, is a hypothesis of the goal and of every milestone.
  • The pointwise bound is claimed for k≥1k\ge1k≥1. The infinite series is stated through all its partial sums ∑k=1K\sum_{k=1}^K∑k=1K​, which is equivalent for nonnegative terms and avoids the junk value of an unconditional tsum.

Dropping the first-step hypothesis would make the goal false, since x1x_1x1​ would then be arbitrary; stating the bound in terms of E(1)\mathcal E(1)E(1) instead of ∥x0−x⋆∥2\|x_0-x^\star\|^2∥x0​−x⋆∥2 would be a different, weaker theorem. Contributions welcome: proofs of the milestones, and EReal bookkeeping lemmas for coefficient-weighted inequalities that are reusable for other accelerated proximal methods.

Selected references

  • W. Su, S. Boyd, E. J. Candès, A Differential Equation for Modeling Nesterov's Accelerated Gradient Method: Theory and Insights, J. Mach. Learn. Res. 17(153), 2016; arXiv:1503.01243v2. https://arxiv.org/abs/1503.01243
  • A. Beck, M. Teboulle, A Fast Iterative Shrinkage-Thresholding Algorithm for Linear Inverse Problems, SIAM J. Imaging Sci. 2(1), 2009. https://doi.org/10.1137/080716542
  • Y. Nesterov, A method of solving a convex programming problem with convergence rate O(1/k²), Soviet Math. Dokl. 27, 1983.
  • A. Chambolle, Ch. Dossal, On the convergence of the iterates of the "fast iterative shrinkage/thresholding algorithm", J. Optim. Theory Appl. 166, 2015. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10957-015-0746-4
  • H. Attouch, J. Peypouquet, The rate of convergence of Nesterov's accelerated forward-backward method is actually faster than 1/k², SIAM J. Optim. 26(3), 2016. https://doi.org/10.1137/15M1046095
9 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Linear algebraQuantum Information·Captain: mikedeng1

Quantum Algorithm for Systems of Linear Equations with Exponentially Improved Dependence on Precision I: A Truncated Odd Chebyshev Series Is 2ε-Close to 1/x on [−1, −1/κ] ∪ [1/κ, 1]Research Paper

Motivation

The quantum linear systems problem asks, given a sparse Hermitian N×NN \times NN×N matrix AAA with condition number κ\kappaκ and a procedure preparing a state ∣b⟩|b\rangle∣b⟩, to prepare a state close to A−1∣b⟩/∥A−1∣b⟩∥A^{-1}|b\rangle / \|A^{-1}|b\rangle\|A−1∣b⟩/∥A−1∣b⟩∥. Harrow, Hassidim and Lloyd (2009) gave a quantum algorithm whose running time is polynomial in log⁡N\log NlogN and κ\kappaκ but grows like 1/ε1/\varepsilon1/ε in the target precision ε\varepsilonε, because it estimates eigenvalues by phase estimation. Childs, Kothari and Somma (arXiv:1511.02306, SIAM J. Comput. 46(6), 2017) reduced the precision dependence to polylog⁡(1/ε)\mathrm{poly}\log(1/\varepsilon)polylog(1/ε), an exponential improvement.

The reduction has two parts. A quantum part implements a linear combination of unitaries applied to AAA, and turns any function that is ε\varepsilonε-close to 1/x1/x1/x on the spectrum of AAA into an approximate preparation of the solution state (Corollary 10 and Proposition 9 of the paper). An analytic part supplies such a function with small degree and small coefficient weight. The paper gives two analytic constructions: a Fourier expansion (Section 3) and an expansion in Chebyshev polynomials (Section 4). This mission formalizes the analytic core of the Chebyshev construction, the input to the paper's Theorem 4. The quantum algorithms and their query and gate counts are not formalized here.

Setting

For a real number κ≥1\kappa \ge 1κ≥1 (a condition number: the ratio of the largest to the smallest singular value), the domain is

Dκ:=[−1,−1/κ]∪[1/κ,1].D_\kappa := [-1, -1/\kappa] \cup [1/\kappa, 1].Dκ​:=[−1,−1/κ]∪[1/κ,1].

A function ggg is ε\varepsilonε-close to hhh on a set D⊆RD \subseteq \mathbb RD⊆R if ∣g(x)−h(x)∣≤ε|g(x) - h(x)| \le \varepsilon∣g(x)−h(x)∣≤ε for all x∈Dx \in Dx∈D.

The Chebyshev polynomials of the first kind are T0(x)=1\mathcal T_0(x) = 1T0​(x)=1, T1(x)=x\mathcal T_1(x) = xT1​(x)=x and Tn+1(x)=2xTn(x)−Tn−1(x)\mathcal T_{n+1}(x) = 2x\mathcal T_n(x) - \mathcal T_{n-1}(x)Tn+1​(x)=2xTn​(x)−Tn−1​(x); those of the second kind Un\mathcal U_nUn​ satisfy the same recursion with U0=1\mathcal U_0 = 1U0​=1, U1=2x\mathcal U_1 = 2xU1​=2x.

For natural numbers b,jb, jb,j let

cb,j:=122b∑i=j+1b(2bb+i),c_{b,j} := \frac{1}{2^{2b}} \sum_{i=j+1}^{b} \binom{2b}{b+i},cb,j​:=22b1​i=j+1∑b​(b+i2b​),

the probability of more than b+jb+jb+j heads in 2b2b2b fair coin flips. The tamed inverse (74) is fb(x)=(1−(1−x2)b)/xf_b(x) = (1 - (1-x^2)^b)/xfb​(x)=(1−(1−x2)b)/x, and the odd Chebyshev series is

Sb,n(x):=4∑j=0n−1(−1)jcb,j T2j+1(x).S_{b,n}(x) := 4 \sum_{j=0}^{n-1} (-1)^j c_{b,j}\, \mathcal T_{2j+1}(x).Sb,n​(x):=4j=0∑n−1​(−1)jcb,j​T2j+1​(x).

In Lean these are Dκ, coeff b j, fTamed b, and chebSum b n in the namespace QuantumLinSys.Chebyshev; bOf κ ε and j0Of b ε are the parameters bbb and j0j_0j0​ below.

Formalization targets

Goal: Lemma 14 (p. 16)

With b=κ2log⁡(κ/ε)b = \kappa^2 \log(\kappa/\varepsilon)b=κ2log(κ/ε) and j0=blog⁡(4b/ε)j_0 = \sqrt{b\log(4b/\varepsilon)}j0​=blog(4b/ε)​, the truncated series

g(x)=4∑j=0j0(−1)jcb,j T2j+1(x)g(x) = 4\sum_{j=0}^{j_0} (-1)^j c_{b,j}\, \mathcal T_{2j+1}(x)g(x)=4j=0∑j0​​(−1)jcb,j​T2j+1​(x)

is 2ε2\varepsilon2ε-close to 1/x1/x1/x on DκD_\kappaDκ​, for every κ≥1\kappa \ge 1κ≥1 and ε>0\varepsilon > 0ε>0.

Milestones, in the order the proof uses them

  1. Lemma 17 (p. 19). For integers d≥1d \ge 1d≥1 and b≥(κd)2log⁡(κd/ε)b \ge (\kappa d)^2\log(\kappa d/\varepsilon)b≥(κd)2log(κd/ε), fbf_bfb​ is ε\varepsilonε-close to 1/x1/x1/x on DκdD_{\kappa d}Dκd​.
  2. Lemma 18 (p. 19). On [−1,1][-1,1][−1,1], fb=Sb,bf_b = S_{b,b}fb​=Sb,b​ exactly:
1−(1−x2)bx=4∑j=0b−1(−1)jcb,j T2j+1(x).\frac{1-(1-x^2)^b}{x} = 4\sum_{j=0}^{b-1}(-1)^j c_{b,j}\,\mathcal T_{2j+1}(x).x1−(1−x2)b​=4j=0∑b−1​(−1)jcb,j​T2j+1​(x).
  1. Display (89) (p. 21). cb,j≤e−j2/bc_{b,j} \le e^{-j^2/b}cb,j​≤e−j2/b.
  2. Lemma 19 (p. 21). The series truncated at j0=blog⁡(4b/ε)j_0 = \sqrt{b\log(4b/\varepsilon)}j0​=blog(4b/ε)​ is ε\varepsilonε-close to fbf_bfb​ on [−1,1][-1,1][−1,1].

Two further statements of the same approach are included as companion theorems: Lemma 16 (p. 17), the closed form of the nnn-th power of the 2×22\times 22×2 rotation block in terms of Tn\mathcal T_nTn​ and Un−1\mathcal U_{n-1}Un−1​, and Proposition 9 (p. 9), the 4ε4\varepsilon4ε perturbation bound for normalized states.

Significance

Lemma 14 provides a polynomial of degree O(κlog⁡(κ/ε))O(\kappa\log(\kappa/\varepsilon))O(κlog(κ/ε)) whose Chebyshev coefficients have total weight O(blog⁡(b/ε))O(\sqrt{b\log(b/\varepsilon)})O(blog(b/ε)​), approximating 1/x1/x1/x uniformly on the region where a well-conditioned matrix has its eigenvalues. Applied to a Hermitian matrix through a quantum walk, whose powers implement Tn\mathcal T_nTn​ (Lemma 16), it gives the query complexity O(dκ2log⁡2(dκ/ε))O(d\kappa^2\log^2(d\kappa/\varepsilon))O(dκ2log2(dκ/ε)) of Theorem 4. The same polynomial approximation of 1/x1/x1/x reappears in later work on quantum singular value transformation and matrix inversion.

All results of this mission are proved in the paper. None of them is machine-checked in Mathlib or on the platform, as far as a search found: Mathlib has the Chebyshev polynomials and the identity Tn(cos⁡θ)=cos⁡nθ\mathcal T_n(\cos\theta) = \cos n\thetaTn​(cosθ)=cosnθ, but no Chebyshev expansion of a rational function, no binomial tail bound in this form, and no approximation theorem for 1/x1/x1/x. The formalization produces a checked uniform approximation of 1/x1/x1/x with explicit, non-asymptotic parameters.

Difficulty

The exact identity (Lemma 18) has no slack: every coefficient, sign and summation bound of (77) must be right for all bbb, and an off-by-one in the inner sum or in the Chebyshev index makes it false. Mathlib's Chebyshev library offers evaluation facts but no expansion of a given polynomial in the Chebyshev basis. The bound (89) is a Chernoff–Hoeffding tail bound for a symmetric binomial distribution, which must be stated for sums of binomial coefficients rather than for random variables. The goal then needs both approximation errors at the page's specific parameters, including the corner cases in which log⁡(κ/ε)\log(\kappa/\varepsilon)log(κ/ε) or log⁡(4b/ε)\log(4b/\varepsilon)log(4b/ε) is negative.

Formalization scope

All functions are real functions of one real variable. Chebyshev polynomials are Mathlib's Polynomial.Chebyshev.T ℝ and Polynomial.Chebyshev.U ℝ, indexed by integers. The sum ∑j=0n−1\sum_{j=0}^{n-1}∑j=0n−1​ is over Finset.range n, so the series of (55)/(88) truncated at j0j_0j0​ is chebSum b (j₀ + 1) and the full series (77) is chebSum b b.

The formalization commits to the following conventions, each disclosed in the item it affects.

  • κ≥1\kappa \ge 1κ≥1 on every statement that mentions DκD_\kappaDκ​, and d≥1d \ge 1d≥1 in Lemma 17. Below these values the domain is empty or contains 000.
  • ε>0\varepsilon > 0ε>0. No upper bound on ε\varepsilonε is imposed in this mission.
  • The paper's real b=κ2log⁡(κ/ε)b = \kappa^2\log(\kappa/\varepsilon)b=κ2log(κ/ε) is rounded up to a natural number in the goal, and the truncation index j0j_0j0​ is rounded down, the sum running over j=0,…,⌊j0⌋j = 0,\dots,\lfloor j_0\rfloorj=0,…,⌊j0​⌋.
  • In Lemmas 17–19 bbb is a natural number. The page's "integer" exponent cannot be negative without making (1−x2)b(1-x^2)^b(1−x2)b singular.
  • At x=0x = 0x=0, fb(0)f_b(0)fb​(0) is Lean's 0/0=00/0 = 00/0=0, which is the value of its continuous extension. Lemma 18 is therefore stated on all of [−1,1][-1,1][−1,1].
  • Proposition 9 is stated for continuous linear operators on CN\mathbb C^NCN, with ∥C−1∥≤1\|C^{-1}\| \le 1∥C−1∥≤1 given as a two-sided inverse of norm at most 111, and for unit vectors ψ\psiψ.

A trivializing reading is ruled out: the goal fixes the page's bbb, j0j_0j0​ and constant 2ε2\varepsilon2ε, so neither an arbitrarily large truncation nor a weaker constant satisfies it, and the domain DκD_\kappaDκ​ excludes the origin, where Lean's 1/0=01/0 = 01/0=0 would make closeness to 1/x1/x1/x meaningless.

Useful infrastructure, reusable beyond this mission: Chebyshev expansions of polynomials on [−1,1][-1,1][−1,1], binomial tail bounds, and uniform approximation of 1/x1/x1/x. Contributions of general lemmas of this kind are welcome.

Selected references

  • A. M. Childs, R. Kothari and R. D. Somma, Quantum algorithm for systems of linear equations with exponentially improved dependence on precision, SIAM J. Comput. 46(6), 2017; arXiv:1511.02306v2. https://arxiv.org/abs/1511.02306
  • A. W. Harrow, A. Hassidim and S. Lloyd, Quantum algorithm for linear systems of equations, Phys. Rev. Lett. 103, 150502, 2009. https://arxiv.org/abs/0811.3171
  • D. W. Berry, A. M. Childs and R. Kothari, Hamiltonian simulation with nearly optimal dependence on all parameters, FOCS 2015. https://arxiv.org/abs/1501.01715
  • W. Hoeffding, Probability inequalities for sums of bounded random variables, J. Amer. Statist. Assoc. 58, 1963. https://doi.org/10.1080/01621459.1963.10500830
6 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Optimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Branch-and-Bound Performance Estimation Programming: A Unified Methodology for Constructing Optimal Optimization Methods: Subgradient Rate L̃²(2√(4κ²(N+1)+1)−1)/(N+1) on Weakly Convex FunctionsResearch Paper

Motivation

Many objectives in statistics and machine learning are neither smooth nor convex, yet are well behaved in a weaker sense: robust phase retrieval, blind deconvolution, robust PCA and training with piecewise-linear losses all lead to weakly convex functions, functions that become convex after adding a fixed quadratic. For such functions the plain subgradient method xk+1=xk−h f′(xk)x_{k+1}=x_k-h\,f'(x_k)xk+1​=xk​−hf′(xk​) remains the method of choice, and the natural question is how fast it reaches approximate stationarity. Davis and Drusvyatskiy (SIAM J. Optim. 2019) gave the first such rate, measured by the gradient of the Moreau envelope, of order L~2 4κ/N+1\widetilde L^2\,4\kappa/\sqrt{N+1}L24κ/N+1​.

Das Gupta, Van Parys and Ryu (Math. Program. 204 (2024) 567–639) introduced BnB-PEP, a branch-and-bound method for solving nonconvex performance-estimation problems to global optimality, and used it to construct optimal and efficient first-order methods. Their one fully analytical result (§6.3) is a new potential-function analysis of the subgradient method on weakly convex functions with bounded subgradients. It produces an explicit stepsize and a rate that strictly improves on the Davis–Drusvyatskiy bound for all large enough NNN. The certificate was found numerically; the paper then gives a classical proof that can be checked by hand. This mission formalizes that result.

Setting

Work in Rd\mathbb R^dRd with the Euclidean norm. A function f:Rd→Rf:\mathbb R^d\to\mathbb Rf:Rd→R is ρ\rhoρ-weakly convex if f+ρ2∥⋅∥2f+\frac{\rho}{2}\|\cdot\|^2f+2ρ​∥⋅∥2 is convex. For such fff, a vector ggg is a subgradient of fff at xxx, written g∈∂f(x)g\in\partial f(x)g∈∂f(x), when

f(y)≥f(x)+⟨g,y−x⟩−ρ2∥y−x∥2∀y∈Rd.f(y)\ge f(x)+\langle g,y-x\rangle-\frac{\rho}{2}\|y-x\|^2\qquad\forall y\in\mathbb R^d .f(y)≥f(x)+⟨g,y−x⟩−2ρ​∥y−x∥2∀y∈Rd.

The class Wρ,L\mathcal W_{\rho,L}Wρ,L​ consists of the ρ\rhoρ-weakly convex fff whose subgradients all satisfy ∥g∥≤L\|g\|\le L∥g∥≤L. Since f∈Wρ,Lf\in\mathcal W_{\rho,L}f∈Wρ,L​ exactly when f/ρ∈W1,L/ρf/\rho\in\mathcal W_{1,L/\rho}f/ρ∈W1,L/ρ​, the paper sets ρ=1\rho=1ρ=1 and writes L~=L/ρ\widetilde L=L/\rhoL=L/ρ; here the normalized bound is written LLL (Lean: InWeakClass 1 L f, with subgradients IsWeakSubgrad 1 f x g).

For ρ^>1\hat\rho>1ρ^​>1 the proximal point prox(1/ρ^)f(x)\mathrm{prox}_{(1/\hat\rho)f}(x)prox(1/ρ^​)f​(x) is the unique minimizer of y↦f(y)+ρ^2∥y−x∥2y\mapsto f(y)+\frac{\hat\rho}{2}\|y-x\|^2y↦f(y)+2ρ^​​∥y−x∥2, and the Moreau envelope is the minimum value

f(1/ρ^)(x)=min⁡y{f(y)+ρ^2∥y−x∥2}f_{(1/\hat\rho)}(x)=\min_{y}\Big\{f(y)+\frac{\hat\rho}{2}\|y-x\|^2\Big\}f(1/ρ^​)​(x)=ymin​{f(y)+2ρ^​​∥y−x∥2}

(Lean: SAGA.Convex.IsProxPoint f (1/ρ̂) x y and moreauEnv ρ̂ f x). The envelope is continuously differentiable, and its gradient ∇f(1/ρ^)(x)=ρ^(x−y)\nabla f_{(1/\hat\rho)}(x)=\hat\rho(x-y)∇f(1/ρ^​)​(x)=ρ^​(x−y) is a subgradient of fff at the prox point yyy. With ρ^=2\hat\rho=2ρ^​=2, the paper's choice, ∥∇f(1/2)(x)∥\|\nabla f_{(1/2)}(x)\|∥∇f(1/2)​(x)∥ small means that xxx is near a point yyy that is nearly stationary for fff.

The method is xk+1=xk−h f′(xk)x_{k+1}=x_k-h\,f'(x_k)xk+1​=xk​−hf′(xk​) for k∈[0:N]k\in[0:N]k∈[0:N], where each f′(xk)∈∂f(xk)f'(x_k)\in\partial f(x_k)f′(xk​)∈∂f(xk​) is arbitrary. One writes yk=prox(1/2)f(xk)y_k=\mathrm{prox}_{(1/2)f}(x_k)yk​=prox(1/2)f​(xk​), f′(yk)=2(xk−yk)f'(y_k)=2(x_k-y_k)f′(yk​)=2(xk​−yk​), assumes a global minimizer x⋆x_\starx⋆​ and the initial condition f(y0)−f(x⋆)+∥x0−y0∥2≤R2f(y_0)-f(x_\star)+\|x_0-y_0\|^2\le R^2f(y0​)−f(x⋆​)+∥x0​−y0​∥2≤R2, and sets κ=R/L\kappa=R/Lκ=R/L.

Formalization targets

Goal: Corollary 1 (p. 625)

For the stepsize h=4κ2(N+1)+1 / (2(N+1))h=\sqrt{4\kappa^2(N+1)+1}\,/\,(2(N+1))h=4κ2(N+1)+1​/(2(N+1)), provided h≤12h\le\frac12h≤21​,

1N+1∑i=0N∥∇f(1/2)(xi)∥2 ≤ L2(24κ2(N+1)+1−1)N+1.\frac{1}{N+1}\sum_{i=0}^{N}\|\nabla f_{(1/2)}(x_i)\|^2\ \le\ \frac{L^2\big(2\sqrt{4\kappa^2(N+1)+1}-1\big)}{N+1}.N+11​i=0∑N​∥∇f(1/2)​(xi​)∥2 ≤ N+1L2(24κ2(N+1)+1​−1)​.

The bound holds for every choice of subgradients along the run.

Theorem 1 (p. 623)

For h∈(0,12]h\in(0,\frac12]h∈(0,21​], bN+1=0b_{N+1}=0bN+1​=0, bk=4+(1−2h)bk+1b_k=4+(1-2h)b_{k+1}bk​=4+(1−2h)bk+1​ and ck=h2bk+1c_k=h^2b_{k+1}ck​=h2bk+1​, the potentials ψk=bk(f(yk)−f(x⋆)+∥xk−yk∥2)\psi_k=b_k\big(f(y_k)-f(x_\star)+\|x_k-y_k\|^2\big)ψk​=bk​(f(yk​)−f(x⋆​)+∥xk​−yk​∥2) satisfy

∥f′(yk)∥2+ψk+1−ψk≤ck∥f′(xk)∥2(k∈[0:N]),1N+1∑i=0N∥∇f(1/2)(xi)∥2≤1N+1(L2∑i=0Nci+b0R2).\|f'(y_k)\|^2+\psi_{k+1}-\psi_k\le c_k\|f'(x_k)\|^2\quad(k\in[0:N]),\qquad \frac{1}{N+1}\sum_{i=0}^{N}\|\nabla f_{(1/2)}(x_i)\|^2\le\frac{1}{N+1}\Big(L^2\sum_{i=0}^{N}c_i+b_0R^2\Big).∥f′(yk​)∥2+ψk+1​−ψk​≤ck​∥f′(xk​)∥2(k∈[0:N]),N+11​i=0∑N​∥∇f(1/2)​(xi​)∥2≤N+11​(L2i=0∑N​ci​+b0​R2).

Milestones

In proof order: the Moreau-envelope facts of §6.3.1; the one-step inequality (32) for an arbitrary point; the telescoping display after (32); the closed form (44) of bkb_kbk​ with nonnegativity; Theorem 1; the closed form (45) of its bound in hhh; the majorant (46) with Bernoulli's upper bound; and the minimizer hub⋆h^\star_{\mathrm{ub}}hub⋆​ of (46) with its value.

Significance

The result. Corollary 1 gives an explicit, non-asymptotic rate for the most basic method of nonsmooth nonconvex optimization, with explicit constants and an explicit stepsize. As N→∞N\to\inftyN→∞ the bound is asymptotic to 4κL2/N+14\kappa L^2/\sqrt{N+1}4κL2/N+1​, and the paper shows it is strictly below the earlier bound L2 4κ/N+1L^2\,4\kappa/\sqrt{N+1}L24κ/N+1​ once N>(9−64κ2)/(64κ2)N>(9-64\kappa^2)/(64\kappa^2)N>(9−64κ2)/(64κ2). It also bounds min⁡i≤N∥∇f(1/2)(xi)∥2\min_{i\le N}\|\nabla f_{(1/2)}(x_i)\|^2mini≤N​∥∇f(1/2)​(xi​)∥2. It shows that computer-assisted performance estimation can produce closed-form guarantees beyond the convex, interpolable function classes where PEP is usually applied.

Formalizing it. The result is proved on paper twice (pp. 622–627), but nothing about weakly convex functions, their subdifferential or the Moreau envelope in the nonconvex regime is formalized on the platform, and the convergence analysis has not been machine-checked. A complete development formalizes the potential-function proof and supplies reusable facts about weakly convex functions and the Moreau envelope.

Difficulty

The scalar part of the argument ((44)–(46) and the plug-in) is elementary algebra and one Bernoulli inequality. The analytic weight sits in two places. First, the Moreau envelope of a nonconvex function: showing that the real infimum is attained at the prox point, that the envelope is differentiable with gradient ρ^(x−y)\hat\rho(x-y)ρ^​(x−y), and that this gradient is a subgradient of fff at yyy with the weak-convexity modulus 111 (not the modulus ρ^\hat\rhoρ^​ that the prox inequality gives directly). Second, inequality (32): it is not a consequence of convexity, since fff is not convex, and it must hold for an arbitrary current point and an arbitrary subgradient, with parameters bk,ckb_k,c_kbk​,ck​ fixed in advance. The obvious route through descent of fff itself fails: f(xk)−f(x⋆)f(x_k)-f(x_\star)f(xk​)−f(x⋆​) need not decrease for nonconvex fff, which is why the potential uses the envelope at the iterates.

Formalization scope

The carrier is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin d), and fff is real-valued and defined everywhere. The weak-convexity modulus is normalized to ρ=1\rho=1ρ=1, and the Lean name L is the paper's L~\widetilde LL; the general class Wρ,L\mathcal W_{\rho,L}Wρ,L​ follows by scaling and is not stated. The subdifferential is the weak-convexity inequality above. For weakly convex fff it equals the Clarke, Fréchet and limiting subdifferentials, so it is the paper's abstract ∂f\partial f∂f in every admissible instance. The convex subdifferential of fff is not used: it can be empty for nonconvex fff and would make the statements vacuous. The run is given by sequences x g y : ℕ → E, with g k an arbitrary subgradient at x k for k≤Nk\le Nk≤N, and y k tied to x k by IsProxPoint f (1/2) for k≤N+1k\le N+1k≤N+1. f′(yk)f'(y_k)f′(yk​) is not free: it is 2(xk−yk)2(x_k-y_k)2(xk​−yk​). The Moreau envelope is a real ⨅; it is finite and attained in this regime, and the first milestone proves this. The parameters b,cb,cb,c of Theorem 1 are pinned by hypotheses, not chosen existentially.

Two hypotheses are made explicit. Corollary 1 is stated "in the setup of Theorem 1", which requires h∈(0,12]h\in(0,\frac12]h∈(0,21​]; for the prescribed stepsize this is 4κ2(N+1)+1≤(N+1)24\kappa^2(N+1)+1\le(N+1)^24κ2(N+1)+1≤(N+1)2, and it is carried as the hypothesis h≤12h\le\frac12h≤21​. It fails for N=0N=0N=0 and whenever κ\kappaκ is large relative to NNN. Inequality (32) is stated for one arbitrary step, under the nonnegativity of the alternate proof's weights (h≥0h\ge0h≥0, bk+1≥0b_{k+1}\ge0bk+1​≥0, hbk+1≤2hb_{k+1}\le2hbk+1​≤2). The minimizer x⋆x_\starx⋆​ is assumed, as in the paper; the remark on p. 627 that inf⁡f>−∞\inf f>-\inftyinff>−∞ suffices is not used.

Useful contributions include basic lemmas on weakly convex functions (existence of subgradients, strong convexity of the prox subproblem), differentiability of the Moreau envelope for ρ^>ρ\hat\rho>\rhoρ^​>ρ, the weighted-sum identity behind (32), and Bernoulli's upper bound (1+a)r≤1/(1−ra)(1+a)^r\le 1/(1-ra)(1+a)r≤1/(1−ra) for a∈[−1,0]a\in[-1,0]a∈[−1,0].

Selected references

  • S. Das Gupta, B. P. G. Van Parys, E. K. Ryu, Branch-and-bound performance estimation programming: a unified methodology for constructing optimal optimization methods, Mathematical Programming 204 (2024) 567–639. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-023-01973-1
  • D. Davis, D. Drusvyatskiy, Stochastic model-based minimization of weakly convex functions, SIAM Journal on Optimization 29(1) (2019) 207–239. https://doi.org/10.1137/18M1178244
  • Y. Drori, M. Teboulle, Performance of first-order methods for smooth convex minimization: a novel approach, Mathematical Programming 145 (2014) 451–482. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-013-0653-0
  • A. B. Taylor, J. M. Hendrickx, F. Glineur, Smooth strongly convex interpolation and exact worst-case performance of first-order methods, Mathematical Programming 161 (2017) 307–345. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-016-0985-6
13 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationFunctional AnalysisOperations Research+1·Captain: mikedeng1

Régularisation d'inéquations variationnelles par approximations successives II: The Proximal Regularization of a Convex Minimization Problem Is a Minimizing SequenceResearch Paper

Motivation

The proximal point algorithm replaces a hard optimization or equilibrium problem by a sequence of better-conditioned ones: from the current point xnx^nxn it solves the original problem with a quadratic penalty ∥x−xn∥2\|x-x^n\|^2∥x−xn∥2 added, and takes the solution as xn+1x^{n+1}xn+1. The method is a building block of modern convex optimization. Augmented Lagrangian methods, Douglas–Rachford and ADMM splitting, and many bundle methods are proximal point iterations applied to suitable problems (Rockafellar 1976; Eckstein–Bertsekas 1992).

The algorithm was introduced by B. Martinet in a five-page note in the Revue française d'informatique et de recherche opérationnelle in 1970 (Martinet 1970). The note treats three cases: monotone variational inequalities on a bounded convex set (§II), convex–concave min–max problems (§III), and convex minimization (§IV). This mission formalizes §IV.

Timeline.

  • 1970, Martinet: the regularization (13) for convex minimization over a closed convex set in a Hilbert space; Théorème 3 (weak cluster points are minimizers, the sequence is minimizing), stated without proof.
  • 1976, Rockafellar (SIAM J. Control Optim. 14): the proximal point algorithm for maximal monotone operators, with inexact steps and weak convergence of the whole sequence when a zero exists.
  • 1991, Güler (SIAM J. Control Optim. 29): the rate f(xn)−inf⁡f=O(1/n)f(x^n)-\inf f = O(1/n)f(xn)−inff=O(1/n) for convex minimization, and an example in which the iterates converge weakly but not strongly.

Setting

Let HHH be a real Hilbert space with inner product ⟨⋅,⋅⟩\langle\cdot,\cdot\rangle⟨⋅,⋅⟩ and norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥. Let C⊆HC\subseteq HC⊆H be a nonempty, closed, convex set, and let f:H→Rf:H\to\mathbb Rf:H→R be a convex, lower semicontinuous function such that, for every a∈Ra\in\mathbb Ra∈R, the sublevel set {x∈C∣f(x)≤a}\{x\in C \mid f(x)\le a\}{x∈C∣f(x)≤a} is bounded. These are the standing hypotheses of §4.1 (Lean: Standing f C). The problem is

(12)min⁡ { f(x)∣x∈C },(12)\qquad \min\,\{\,f(x)\mid x\in C\,\},(12)min{f(x)∣x∈C},

and its solution set (solSet f C) is the set of xˉ∈C\bar x\in Cxˉ∈C with f(xˉ)≤f(x)f(\bar x)\le f(x)f(xˉ)≤f(x) for all x∈Cx\in Cx∈C.

The regularization algorithm (13) starts from x0∈Cx^0\in Cx0∈C and, given xnx^nxn, takes

(13)xn+1∈C  the minimizer of  f(x)+∥x−xn∥2  over x∈C.(13)\qquad x^{n+1}\in C\ \text{ the minimizer of } \ f(x)+\|x-x^n\|^2\ \text{ over } x\in C .(13)xn+1∈C  the minimizer of  f(x)+∥x−xn∥2  over x∈C.

Lean encodes one step as IsProxStep f C xn y (y∈Cy\in Cy∈C and f(y)+∥y−xn∥2≤f(x)+∥x−xn∥2f(y)+\|y-x^n\|^2\le f(x)+\|x-x^n\|^2f(y)+∥y−xn∥2≤f(x)+∥x−xn∥2 for all x∈Cx\in Cx∈C) and a run as IsProxSeq f C x.

A point x~\tilde xx~ is a weak cluster point of (xn)(x^n)(xn) (IsWeakClusterPt) if every neighbourhood of x~\tilde xx~ in the weak topology of HHH contains xnx^nxn for infinitely many nnn. A sequence is minimizing if f(xn)→inf⁡x∈Cf(x)f(x^n)\to\inf_{x\in C} f(x)f(xn)→infx∈C​f(x).

Formalization targets

Existence for (12) and well-posedness of (13)

∃ xˉ∈C  ∀x∈C: f(xˉ)≤f(x),∀xn∈C  ∃! y∈C: y minimizes f(x)+∥x−xn∥2 over C.\exists\,\bar x\in C\ \ \forall x\in C:\ f(\bar x)\le f(x), \qquad \forall x^n\in C\ \ \exists!\,y\in C:\ y \text{ minimizes } f(x)+\|x-x^n\|^2 \text{ over } C .∃xˉ∈C  ∀x∈C: f(xˉ)≤f(x),∀xn∈C  ∃!y∈C: y minimizes f(x)+∥x−xn∥2 over C.

These are the paper's claims in §4.1 ("Ces hypothèses assurent l'existence d'une solution pour (12)") and §4.2 ("solution unique").

Goal: Théorème 3

For every sequence generated by (13),

x~ a weak cluster point of (xn) ⟹ x~∈sol⁡(12),lim⁡n→∞f(xn)=inf⁡x∈Cf(x)∈R.\tilde x \text{ a weak cluster point of } (x^n)\ \Longrightarrow\ \tilde x\in \operatorname{sol}(12), \qquad \lim_{n\to\infty} f(x^n)=\inf_{x\in C} f(x)\in\mathbb R .x~ a weak cluster point of (xn) ⟹ x~∈sol(12),n→∞lim​f(xn)=x∈Cinf​f(x)∈R.

The goal asserts no rate and no constant. It is the statement the paper makes, with both conclusions in one theorem.

Stronger: Remarque 1

If in addition fff is uniformly convex, i.e. f(ax+by)≤af(x)+bf(y)−ab φ(∥x−y∥)f(ax+by)\le af(x)+bf(y)-ab\,\varphi(\|x-y\|)f(ax+by)≤af(x)+bf(y)−abφ(∥x−y∥) for a,b≥0a,b\ge0a,b≥0, a+b=1a+b=1a+b=1, with φ(t)>0\varphi(t)>0φ(t)>0 for t>0t>0t>0, then (12) has a unique solution xˉ\bar xxˉ and ∥xn−xˉ∥→0\|x^n-\bar x\|\to0∥xn−xˉ∥→0.

Significance

The result. Théorème 3 says that the proximal iterates make progress on the objective, not only on the distance to the solution set. A user of the method can stop on a value criterion. The convergence also needs no step-size tuning, no smoothness of fff, and no bound on fff beyond the boundedness of the sublevel sets. The well-posedness of (13) is what makes the method an algorithm. Each step is a strongly convex subproblem with a unique solution, and later inexact and splitting variants rely on that.

Formalizing it. The note gives no proof of Théorème 3 ("On peut faire une démonstration directe de ce théorème") and none of Remarque 1. The mission asks for a complete machine-checked proof of the convex minimization case of the original proximal point paper. To our knowledge, none of these statements has a machine-checked proof. Mathlib has convexity, lower semicontinuity, the weak topology of a normed space and uniform convexity of functions, but no proximal point algorithm.

Difficulty

Each iterate xn+1x^{n+1}xn+1 is defined only implicitly, as the minimizer of a problem that changes with nnn. Monotonicity of f(xn)f(x^n)f(xn) follows at once from comparing xn+1x^{n+1}xn+1 with xnx^nxn. Monotonicity alone gives convergence of f(xn)f(x^n)f(xn) to some limit, but not to inf⁡Cf\inf_C finfC​f. Closing that gap needs information about the minimizers of (12) and their distance to the iterates.

The cluster-point statement is about the weak topology. A norm-continuity argument does not apply: fff is only lower semicontinuous in norm, and passing to weak limits requires the weak lower semicontinuity of convex lower semicontinuous functions. The boundedness that makes weak cluster points exist comes from the sublevel-set hypothesis, not from CCC, which may be unbounded.

For Remarque 1, the obvious argument controls φ(∥xn−xˉ∥)\varphi(\|x^n-\bar x\|)φ(∥xn−xˉ∥), and the hypothesis on φ\varphiφ is only positivity. Passing from φ(∥xn−xˉ∥)→0\varphi(\|x^n-\bar x\|)\to0φ(∥xn−xˉ∥)→0 to ∥xn−xˉ∥→0\|x^n-\bar x\|\to0∥xn−xˉ∥→0 is not immediate without a monotone modulus.

Formalization scope

All statements live in MartinetReg.ConvexMin. The conventions the formalization commits to:

  • HHH is a real complete inner product space (InnerProductSpace ℝ H, CompleteSpace H). The paper says "espace de Hilbert", and its inequalities make it real.
  • C≠∅C\neq\emptysetC=∅ is a standing hypothesis. The paper leaves it implicit, but its existence claim for (12) is false for C=∅C=\emptysetC=∅.
  • fff is real-valued, convex and lower semicontinuous on all of HHH, as printed. The constraint x∈Cx\in Cx∈C stays explicit in (12) and (13). It is not absorbed into an extended-valued indicator.
  • The penalty in (13) has weight 111, as printed, not 12\tfrac1221​.
  • The algorithm is a relation on sequences: IsProxSeq accepts any sequence with x0∈Cx^0\in Cx0∈C satisfying (13) at every step. Existence and uniqueness of the step are a separate milestone, not built into a definition by choice.
  • "Minimisante" is stated as: some real mmm is the greatest lower bound of f(C)f(C)f(C) and f(xn)→mf(x^n)\to mf(xn)→m. This avoids the junk value sInf takes on sets unbounded below. As a side effect, the theorem asserts that fff is bounded below on CCC.
  • Weak cluster points are cluster points in WeakSpace ℝ H. A norm cluster point would weaken the conclusion and is not used.
  • Remarque 1 uses Mathlib's UniformConvexOn Set.univ φ f with φ(t)>0\varphi(t)>0φ(t)>0 for t>0t>0t>0. It keeps every hypothesis of §4.1.

The goal does not assume that (12) has a solution, that fff is bounded below on CCC, or that the iterates are bounded. Each of these would remove part of the content of Théorème 3, and the first two are consequences proved as milestones.

Not formalized here: Remarque 2 (p. 158), a comment that convexity seems indispensable; and the Exemple (p. 158). The Exemple's linear system (A∗A+2I)xn+1=A∗b+2xn(A^*A+2I)x^{n+1}=A^*b+2x^n(A∗A+2I)xn+1=A∗b+2xn corresponds to f=12∥Ax−b∥2f=\tfrac12\|Ax-b\|^2f=21​∥Ax−b∥2. For the printed f=∥Ax−b∥2f=\|Ax-b\|^2f=∥Ax−b∥2, (13) gives (A∗A+I)xn+1=A∗b+xn(A^*A+I)x^{n+1}=A^*b+x^n(A∗A+I)xn+1=A∗b+xn. The variational inequality case (§II) is the companion mission I of this series.

Reusable beyond this mission: the existence of minimizers of convex lower semicontinuous functions with bounded sublevel sets on closed convex subsets of a Hilbert space, and the weak lower semicontinuity it rests on. Contributions of these general lemmas, and of strong-convexity facts for x↦f(x)+∥x−xn∥2x\mapsto f(x)+\|x-x^n\|^2x↦f(x)+∥x−xn∥2, are welcome.

Selected references

  • B. Martinet, Brève communication. Régularisation d'inéquations variationnelles par approximations successives, Revue française d'informatique et de recherche opérationnelle, série rouge, 4(R-3), 154–158, 1970. https://doi.org/10.1051/m2an/197004R301541
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Monotone operators and the proximal point algorithm, SIAM Journal on Control and Optimization 14(5), 877–898, 1976. https://doi.org/10.1137/0314056
  • O. Güler, On the convergence of the proximal point algorithm for convex minimization, SIAM Journal on Control and Optimization 29(2), 403–419, 1991. https://doi.org/10.1137/0329022
  • J. Eckstein and D. P. Bertsekas, On the Douglas–Rachford splitting method and the proximal point algorithm for maximal monotone operators, Mathematical Programming 55, 293–318, 1992. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01581204
  • J. L. Lions and G. Stampacchia, Variational inequalities, Communications on Pure and Applied Mathematics 20, 493–519, 1967. https://doi.org/10.1002/cpa.3160200302
6 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Fixed Point and Bregman Iterative Methods for Matrix Rank Minimization: The Matrix Shrinkage Fixed Point Iteration Converges to an Optimal Solution of the Nuclear Norm Regularized ProblemResearch Paper

Motivation

Many estimation problems ask for a matrix of low rank that is consistent with a small number of linear measurements: completing a partially observed ratings matrix, identifying a low-order linear system, or embedding points from a few pairwise distances. Rank minimization under linear constraints is NP-hard, and the standard convex surrogate replaces the rank by the nuclear norm, the sum of the singular values (Recht, Fazel and Parrilo, 2010). Under incoherence assumptions the surrogate recovers the low-rank matrix exactly (Candès and Recht, 2009).

The surrogate is a semidefinite program, and interior point methods for it do not scale past matrices of a few hundred rows. Ma, Goldfarb and Chen (2009) proposed a first-order method for the regularized form of the problem: a gradient step on the data-fit term followed by singular value shrinkage. Their algorithms FPC and FPCA are built on this two-line iteration, and the paper's one convergence theorem says that the iteration, run with a fixed step size, converges to a minimizer. This mission formalizes that theorem and the lemmas used to prove it.

Timeline of the closest results:

  • 2005: Combettes and Wajs prove convergence of forward–backward splitting for the sum of a convex function and a convex function with Lipschitz gradient in a Hilbert space.
  • 2008: Hale, Yin and Zhang analyse the fixed point continuation (FPC) method for ℓ1\ell_1ℓ1​-regularized least squares, with vector shrinkage in place of matrix shrinkage.
  • 2008–2010: Cai, Candès and Shen introduce singular value thresholding (SVT) for matrix completion, prove that the shrinkage is the proximal map of the nuclear norm, and prove convergence of a different iteration (Uzawa's method on a strongly convex problem with equality constraints).
  • 2009: Ma, Goldfarb and Chen state and prove convergence of the matrix shrinkage fixed point iteration for the nuclear norm regularized least squares problem (1.8), following Hale, Yin and Zhang's argument.

Setting

Fix natural numbers m,n,pm,n,pm,n,p. Matrices X∈Rm×nX\in\mathbb R^{m\times n}X∈Rm×n carry the Frobenius norm ∥X∥F=(∑ijXij2)1/2\|X\|_F=(\sum_{ij}X_{ij}^2)^{1/2}∥X∥F​=(∑ij​Xij2​)1/2 and the nuclear norm ∥X∥∗=∑iσi(X)\|X\|_*=\sum_i\sigma_i(X)∥X∥∗​=∑i​σi​(X). A linear map A:Rm×n→Rp\mathcal A:\mathbb R^{m\times n}\to\mathbb R^pA:Rm×n→Rp is given by matrices A0,…,Ap−1A_0,\dots,A_{p-1}A0​,…,Ap−1​ through A(X)i=⟨Ai,X⟩\mathcal A(X)_i=\langle A_i,X\rangleA(X)i​=⟨Ai​,X⟩; equivalently AX=A vec(X)\mathcal AX=A\,\mathrm{vec}(X)AX=Avec(X) for a matrix A∈Rp×mnA\in\mathbb R^{p\times mn}A∈Rp×mn. Its adjoint is A∗\mathcal A^*A∗, and λmax⁡(A⊤A)=∥A∥22\lambda_{\max}(A^\top A)=\|\mathcal A\|_2^2λmax​(A⊤A)=∥A∥22​, the square of its spectral norm. Fix b∈Rpb\in\mathbb R^pb∈Rp and μ>0\mu>0μ>0.

Problem (1.8) is

min⁡X∈Rm×n μ∥X∥∗+12∥A(X)−b∥22,\min_{X\in\mathbb R^{m\times n}}\ \mu\|X\|_*+\tfrac12\|\mathcal A(X)-b\|_2^2 ,X∈Rm×nmin​ μ∥X∥∗​+21​∥A(X)−b∥22​,

and X∗\mathcal X^*X∗ denotes its set of optimal solutions. Write g(X)=A∗(A(X)−b)g(X)=\mathcal A^*(\mathcal A(X)-b)g(X)=A∗(A(X)−b) for the gradient of the data-fit term and h(X)=X−τg(X)h(X)=X-\tau g(X)h(X)=X−τg(X) for a gradient step of size τ>0\tau>0τ>0.

For ν>0\nu>0ν>0, the matrix shrinkage operator SνS_\nuSν​ takes a singular value decomposition Y=U Diag(σ)V⊤Y=U\,\mathrm{Diag}(\sigma)V^\topY=UDiag(σ)V⊤ to Sν(Y)=U Diag(σˉ)V⊤S_\nu(Y)=U\,\mathrm{Diag}(\bar\sigma)V^\topSν​(Y)=UDiag(σˉ)V⊤, where σˉi=max⁡(σi−ν,0)\bar\sigma_i=\max(\sigma_i-\nu,0)σˉi​=max(σi​−ν,0). The fixed point iterations (2.1) start from an arbitrary X0X^0X0 and repeat

Yk=Xk−τg(Xk),Xk+1=Sτμ(Yk).Y^k=X^k-\tau g(X^k),\qquad X^{k+1}=S_{\tau\mu}(Y^k).Yk=Xk−τg(Xk),Xk+1=Sτμ​(Yk).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4

For τ∈(0,2/λmax⁡(A⊤A))\tau\in(0,2/\lambda_{\max}(A^\top A))τ∈(0,2/λmax​(A⊤A)) and every starting point, there is X∗∈X∗X^*\in\mathcal X^*X∗∈X∗ with

lim⁡k→∞∥Xk−X∗∥F=0.\lim_{k\to\infty}\|X^k-X^*\|_F=0 .k→∞lim​∥Xk−X∗∥F​=0.

The goal fixes no rate and no particular limit: it asserts convergence of the whole sequence to some minimizer.

Milestones, in attack order

  1. Theorem 3. Sν(Y)S_\nu(Y)Sν​(Y) is an optimal solution of min⁡Xν∥X∥∗+12∥X−Y∥F2\min_X\nu\|X\|_*+\tfrac12\|X-Y\|_F^2minX​ν∥X∥∗​+21​∥X−Y∥F2​. This is already posed on the platform as Cai, Candès and Shen's Theorem 2.1 (which adds uniqueness) and is referenced, not restated.
  2. Corollary 1. For every τ>0\tau>0τ>0: X∗∈X∗X^*\in\mathcal X^*X∗∈X∗ if and only if X∗=Sτμ(h(X∗))X^*=S_{\tau\mu}(h(X^*))X∗=Sτμ​(h(X∗)).
  3. Lemma 1. ∥Sν(Y1)−Sν(Y2)∥F≤∥Y1−Y2∥F\|S_\nu(Y_1)-S_\nu(Y_2)\|_F\le\|Y_1-Y_2\|_F∥Sν​(Y1​)−Sν​(Y2​)∥F​≤∥Y1​−Y2​∥F​, with equality if and only if Y1−Y2=Sν(Y1)−Sν(Y2)Y_1-Y_2=S_\nu(Y_1)-S_\nu(Y_2)Y1​−Y2​=Sν​(Y1​)−Sν​(Y2​).
  4. Lemma 2. For τ\tauτ in the step range, ∥h(X)−h(X′)∥F≤∥X−X′∥F\|h(X)-h(X')\|_F\le\|X-X'\|_F∥h(X)−h(X′)∥F​≤∥X−X′∥F​, and h(X)−h(X′)=X−X′h(X)-h(X')=X-X'h(X)−h(X′)=X−X′ if and only if equality holds.
  5. Lemma 3. If X∗∈X∗X^*\in\mathcal X^*X∗∈X∗, then X∈X∗X\in\mathcal X^*X∈X∗ if and only if ∥Sτμ(h(X))−X∗∥F=∥X−X∗∥F\|S_{\tau\mu}(h(X))-X^*\|_F=\|X-X^*\|_F∥Sτμ​(h(X))−X∗∥F​=∥X−X∗∥F​.

The mission also contains the paper's Theorem 2, the optimality condition for (1.8) written with a reduced singular value decomposition X=U Diag(σ)V⊤X=U\,\mathrm{Diag}(\sigma)V^\topX=UDiag(σ)V⊤: X∈X∗X\in\mathcal X^*X∈X∗ if and only if some WWW satisfies μ(UV⊤+W)+g(X)=0\mu(UV^\top+W)+g(X)=0μ(UV⊤+W)+g(X)=0, U⊤W=0U^\top W=0U⊤W=0, WV=0WV=0WV=0 and ∥W∥2≤1\|W\|_2\le1∥W∥2​≤1. The chain to Theorem 4 does not use it.

Significance

Theorem 4 is the correctness guarantee for FPC and FPCA, which were among the first algorithms to solve nuclear norm regularized problems with matrices in the thousands of rows. It certifies that the output of the plain iteration is an exact minimizer in the limit, for every starting point and every step below 2/λmax⁡(A⊤A)2/\lambda_{\max}(A^\top A)2/λmax​(A⊤A). Lemmas 1–3 are the reusable part: non-expansiveness of the matrix shrinkage with a precise equality case, and the fixed point characterization of the optimal set, are the ingredients of every proximal gradient analysis with nuclear norm regularization.

Status: the theorem is proved on paper, and it is also a special case of the general convergence of forward–backward splitting. No machine-checked proof of it is known. The platform holds general forward–backward and inertial forward–backward convergence statements in Hilbert space (for example NesterovFB.Weak.theorem_3, InertialFB.IFB.theorem1_convergence) and the nonexpansiveness of abstract proximal maps (MoreauProx.Characterization.prox_nonexpansive). None is stated for the nuclear norm, for matrix shrinkage defined through the SVD, or with Ma, Goldfarb and Chen's equality cases. Formalizing this mission connects Mathlib's singular values to these operator-theoretic statements.

Difficulty

The obvious route goes through Fejér monotonicity: every step brings the iterate no farther from any minimizer, so the iterates are bounded and have a limit point. Two steps of this route do not come for free. First, the argument presupposes a minimizer; nothing in the hypotheses provides one, so the existence of an optimal solution of (1.8) has to be established from the data. Second, a limit point must be shown to be optimal, which requires the equality cases of Lemmas 1 and 2, not just the inequalities. Lemma 1's equality case concerns the singular value decompositions of two unrelated matrices whose singular vectors need not be aligned; non-expansiveness alone does not deliver it. Nonexpansive maps in general need not have convergent iterates (a rotation is nonexpansive), so continuity plus boundedness is not enough.

Formalization scope

  • Matrices are Matrix (Fin m) (Fin n) ℝ. The Frobenius norm, the nuclear norm (the sum of Mathlib's LinearMap.singularValues), the linear map A\mathcal AA as ppp matrices Aop, its adjoint and spectral norm, and the shrinkage relation IsShrink are reused from the published Cai–Candès–Shen definitions.
  • SνS_\nuSν​ is a relation, IsShrink ν Y X: XXX is the shrinkage of YYY for some reduced SVD (orthonormal columns, positive singular values). Every statement takes the shrinkage output as a variable with an IsShrink hypothesis. The paper's Definition 4 also allows zero singular values, which shrink to zero and change nothing.
  • The step range τ∈(0,2/λmax⁡(A⊤A))\tau\in(0,2/\lambda_{\max}(A^\top A))τ∈(0,2/λmax​(A⊤A)) is written 0<τ0<\tau0<τ and τ∥A∥22<2\tau\|\mathcal A\|_2^2<2τ∥A∥22​<2, without division. For A=0\mathcal A=0A=0 this is the range (0,∞)(0,\infty)(0,∞), as on paper, rather than the empty range that Lean's 2/0=02/0=02/0=0 would give.
  • μ>0\mu>0μ>0 is an explicit hypothesis, and so is ν>0\nu>0ν>0 in Lemma 1; in Corollary 1, τ>0\tau>0τ>0 is the only condition on the step, as on the page ("for any τ>0\tau>0τ>0"). ν=τμ\nu=\tau\muν=τμ is built into the statements.
  • The run of (2.1) is a predicate on the whole sequence with an arbitrary X0X^0X0; it is not the continuation scheme FPC and does not fix X0=0X^0=0X0=0.
  • Convergence is in the Frobenius norm to some minimizer chosen after the run. Neither X∗≠∅\mathcal X^*\neq\emptysetX∗=∅ nor boundedness of the iterates is a hypothesis; a statement that assumes either is a different, weaker theorem and is ruled out.
  • No statement assumes m≤nm\le nm≤n; the paper's "without loss of generality" belongs to its proofs.

A complete development needs the SVD of real matrices in terms of Mathlib's singular values, the subdifferential of the nuclear norm, and a Fejér-monotone convergence argument in finite dimension. The first two are reusable for any nuclear norm or spectral function result, and contributions of general lemmas about singular value shrinkage (functionality of IsShrink, its proximal characterization) are welcome.

Selected references

  • S. Ma, D. Goldfarb, L. Chen, Fixed point and Bregman iterative methods for matrix rank minimization, Math. Program. 128 (2011); preprint arXiv:0905.1643v2, 2009. https://arxiv.org/abs/0905.1643
  • J.-F. Cai, E. J. Candès, Z. Shen, A singular value thresholding algorithm for matrix completion, SIAM J. Optim. 20(4), 2010. https://arxiv.org/abs/0810.3286
  • E. T. Hale, W. Yin, Y. Zhang, Fixed-point continuation for ℓ1-minimization: methodology and convergence, SIAM J. Optim. 19(3), 2008. https://doi.org/10.1137/070698920
  • P. L. Combettes, V. R. Wajs, Signal recovery by proximal forward-backward splitting, Multiscale Model. Simul. 4(4), 2005. https://doi.org/10.1137/050626090
  • B. Recht, M. Fazel, P. A. Parrilo, Guaranteed minimum-rank solutions of linear matrix equations via nuclear norm minimization, SIAM Review 52(3), 2010. https://arxiv.org/abs/0706.4138
  • E. J. Candès, B. Recht, Exact matrix completion via convex optimization, Found. Comput. Math. 9, 2009. https://arxiv.org/abs/0805.4471
10 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Multilevel Monte Carlo Path Simulation: The Multilevel Estimator Achieves Mean-Square Error Below ε² at Cost c₄ε⁻², c₄ε⁻²(log ε)² or c₄ε^(−2−(1−β)/α)Research Paper

Why the cost of path simulation matters

Pricing a financial derivative, estimating a risk measure, or computing any expected functional of a stochastic differential equation (SDE) by simulation runs into two errors at once: the statistical error of averaging finitely many sampled paths, and the discretisation bias of replacing the exact SDE solution by a numerical scheme with a positive timestep. With the Euler scheme and NNN independent paths, the mean-square error behaves like c1N−1+c2h2c_1N^{-1}+c_2h^2c1​N−1+c2​h2, so a root-mean-square accuracy ε\varepsilonε requires N∼ε−2N\sim\varepsilon^{-2}N∼ε−2 paths of h−1∼ε−1h^{-1}\sim\varepsilon^{-1}h−1∼ε−1 steps each: a cost of order ε−3\varepsilon^{-3}ε−3.

Giles' Multilevel Monte Carlo path simulation (Operations Research 56(3), 2008) showed that combining simulations on a geometric hierarchy of timesteps reduces this cost to order ε−2(log⁡ε)2\varepsilon^{-2}(\log\varepsilon)^2ε−2(logε)2 for the Euler scheme with a Lipschitz payoff, and to ε−2\varepsilon^{-2}ε−2, the cost of an unbiased estimator, when the level differences have fast-decaying variance. The two-level case is due to Kebaier (2005), who reduced the cost to order ε−2.5\varepsilon^{-2.5}ε−2.5; Heinrich's multilevel method for parametric integration (2001) is a precursor. The paper's Theorem 3.1 is stated abstractly, in terms of four rate conditions, and has since been applied to SDEs, SPDEs, Markov chains and nested simulation; the survey of Giles (Acta Numerica 2015) traces this development.

The multilevel estimator

Fix an integer refinement factor M≥2M\ge2M≥2 and a horizon T>0T>0T>0, and let the timestep of level lll be hl=M−lTh_l=M^{-l}Thl​=M−lT, l=0,1,2,…l=0,1,2,\dotsl=0,1,2,…. On a probability space, let PPP be the quantity of interest (in the paper, a functional of the solution of an SDE driven by a Brownian path) and P^l\widehat P_lPl​ its approximation with timestep hlh_lhl​. Since

E[P^L]=E[P^0]+∑l=1LE[P^l−P^l−1],E[\widehat P_L]=E[\widehat P_0]+\sum_{l=1}^{L}E[\widehat P_l-\widehat P_{l-1}],E[PL​]=E[P0​]+l=1∑L​E[Pl​−Pl−1​],

the method estimates each term independently. For each level lll and sample size Nl≥1N_l\ge1Nl​≥1, Y^l\widehat Y_lYl​ is an estimator of E[P^0]E[\widehat P_0]E[P0​] (l=0l=0l=0) or of E[P^l−P^l−1]E[\widehat P_l-\widehat P_{l-1}]E[Pl​−Pl−1​] (l>0l>0l>0) built from NlN_lNl​ samples, with computational complexity ClC_lCl​. The multilevel estimator is Y^=∑l=0LY^l\widehat Y=\sum_{l=0}^{L}\widehat Y_lY=∑l=0L​Yl​, its total complexity is C=∑l=0LClC=\sum_{l=0}^LC_lC=∑l=0L​Cl​, and its mean-square error is MSE=E[(Y^−E[P])2]\mathrm{MSE}=E[(\widehat Y-E[P])^2]MSE=E[(Y−E[P])2].

The hypotheses are four rate conditions, with constants α≥12\alpha\ge\frac12α≥21​ and β,c1,c2,c3>0\beta,c_1,c_2,c_3>0β,c1​,c2​,c3​>0: (i) ∣E[P^l−P]∣≤c1hlα|E[\widehat P_l-P]|\le c_1h_l^\alpha∣E[Pl​−P]∣≤c1​hlα​ (weak convergence order α\alphaα); (ii) E[Y^l]E[\widehat Y_l]E[Yl​] equals E[P^0]E[\widehat P_0]E[P0​] or E[P^l−P^l−1]E[\widehat P_l-\widehat P_{l-1}]E[Pl​−Pl−1​] (unbiasedness of each level); (iii) V[Y^l]≤c2Nl−1hlβV[\widehat Y_l]\le c_2N_l^{-1}h_l^\betaV[Yl​]≤c2​Nl−1​hlβ​ (variance decay rate β\betaβ); (iv) Cl≤c3Nlhl−1C_l\le c_3N_lh_l^{-1}Cl​≤c3​Nl​hl−1​ (cost proportional to samples times steps).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.1

There is a constant c4>0c_4>0c4​>0 such that for every 0<ε<e−10<\varepsilon<e^{-1}0<ε<e−1 there are LLL and Nl≥1N_l\ge1Nl​≥1 with

MSE<ε2,C≤{c4ε−2,β>1,c4ε−2(log⁡ε)2,β=1,c4ε−2−(1−β)/α,0<β<1.\mathrm{MSE}<\varepsilon^2,\qquad C\le\begin{cases}c_4\varepsilon^{-2},&\beta>1,\\ c_4\varepsilon^{-2}(\log\varepsilon)^2,&\beta=1,\\ c_4\varepsilon^{-2-(1-\beta)/\alpha},&0<\beta<1.\end{cases}MSE<ε2,C≤⎩⎨⎧​c4​ε−2,c4​ε−2(logε)2,c4​ε−2−(1−β)/α,​β>1,β=1,0<β<1.​

The constant c4c_4c4​ is uniform in ε\varepsilonε; its value is not part of the goal.

Milestones

The milestones are the displayed steps of the paper's proof, in its order: the choice of the finest level and the resulting two-sided bound (6) on c1hLαc_1h_L^\alphac1​hLα​; the bound 12ε2\frac12\varepsilon^221​ε2 on the squared bias; the geometric bound (7) on ∑lhl−1\sum_l h_l^{-1}∑l​hl−1​; and, for each of the three regimes β=1\beta=1β=1, β>1\beta>1β>1, β<1\beta<1β<1, a choice of NlN_lNl​ with a 12ε2\frac12\varepsilon^221​ε2 bound on the variance (using the geometric bounds (8) and (9) in the last two) and an explicit cost bound with an explicit constant c4c_4c4​. In case β=1\beta=1β=1 the bound L+1≤c5log⁡ε−1L+1\le c_5\log\varepsilon^{-1}L+1≤c5​logε−1 on the number of levels is a separate milestone.

What the result gives

The theorem turns the multilevel idea into a complexity statement: whenever a discretisation has weak order α\alphaα and its level corrections have variance decay β\betaβ, the cost of accuracy ε\varepsilonε is known up to a constant. It identifies β\betaβ as the parameter governing the method, explains where the effort is spent (coarse levels for β>1\beta>1β>1, fine levels for β<1\beta<1β<1), and is the template that later multilevel analyses (Milstein schemes, multi-index Monte Carlo, randomised MLMC) follow and refine.

The result is proved in the paper and widely reused. To our knowledge it has no machine-checked proof. The mission produces one: a Lean statement of the abstract theorem and of each step of the proof, with the paper's explicit constants. Its probabilistic content is light (linearity of expectation, the bias-variance decomposition, Bienaymé's identity for independent variables); most of the work is careful real analysis with ceilings, logarithms and real powers.

Where the difficulty lies

No single step is deep; the difficulty is bookkeeping under exact constants. The obvious argument "choose hL≈εh_L\approx\varepsilonhL​≈ε, choose Nl∝ε−2hl(β+1)/2N_l\propto\varepsilon^{-2}h_l^{(\beta+1)/2}Nl​∝ε−2hl(β+1)/2​" is asymptotic. The theorem demands, for every ε<e−1\varepsilon<e^{-1}ε<e−1, an exact bound with a constant independent of ε\varepsilonε. This forces the integer ceilings in LLL and NlN_lNl​ to be controlled explicitly (each ceiling adds one sample per level, whose total cost is (7)), the number of levels to be bounded by a multiple of log⁡ε−1\log\varepsilon^{-1}logε−1, and the three geometric series to be summed with constants independent of LLL. The strict inequality MSE<ε2\mathrm{MSE}<\varepsilon^2MSE<ε2 is not delivered by the paper's own choice in case β=1\beta=1β=1, where both halves give only ≤12ε2\le\frac12\varepsilon^2≤21​ε2; a solver must adjust the sample sizes.

Formalization scope

PPP, P^l\widehat P_lPl​ and the level estimators are arbitrary real random variables on a probability space (Ω,μ)(\Omega,\mu)(Ω,μ); the SDE and its discretisation enter the theorem only through (i)–(iv), so they are not modelled. This makes the statement more general, not weaker. Expectations are Bochner integrals and VVV is Mathlib's variance. The conventions are:

  • the level estimator is indexed by level and sample size, Y^l(n)\widehat Y_l^{(n)}Yl(n)​, and (ii), (iii), (iv), square integrability and mutual independence of (Y^l(Nl))l(\widehat Y_l^{(N_l)})_l(Yl(Nl​)​)l​ are assumed for every sample size n≥1n\ge1n≥1 (every choice of Nl≥1N_l\ge1Nl​≥1), because the conclusion chooses the sample sizes;
  • (i) carries an absolute value: the page prints the one-sided E[P^l−P]≤c1hlαE[\widehat P_l-P]\le c_1h_l^\alphaE[Pl​−P]≤c1​hlα​, under which the theorem is false;
  • PPP and P^l\widehat P_lPl​ are integrable and Y^l(n)∈L2\widehat Y_l^{(n)}\in L^2Yl(n)​∈L2, because Lean's integral and variance return 000 off these classes;
  • M≥2M\ge2M≥2 (the paper's standing assumption), T>0T>0T>0, and ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0 (implicit in "ε<e−1\varepsilon<e^{-1}ε<e−1");
  • the cost Cl(n)C_l^{(n)}Cl(n)​ is an abstract real number constrained only by (iv), and C=∑l=0LClC=\sum_{l=0}^LC_lC=∑l=0L​Cl​;
  • LLL in (6) is an integer ceiling, which can be negative for large ε\varepsilonε; the milestones with explicit constants assume it is a natural number, a case the paper's proof assumes silently, while the goal does not;
  • real powers are Real.rpow, ⌈⋅⌉\lceil\cdot\rceil⌈⋅⌉ is Int.ceil for LLL and Nat.ceil for NlN_lNl​ (whose arguments are positive).

A formalization in which the cost is defined as c3∑lNlhl−1c_3\sum_lN_lh_l^{-1}c3​∑l​Nl​hl−1​, in which (ii)–(iv) hold only for one fixed sample size, or in which the MSE and cost bounds are proved for different LLL and NlN_lNl​, is a different and weaker theorem and is ruled out by the statement.

Infrastructure needed: geometric-series bounds with real ratios, floor and ceiling estimates for logarithms, and Bienaymé's identity (Mathlib's IndepFun.variance_sum). The bias-variance decomposition MSE=V[Y^]+(E[Y^]−E[P])2\mathrm{MSE}=V[\widehat Y]+(E[\widehat Y]-E[P])^2MSE=V[Y]+(E[Y]−E[P])2 for L2L^2L2 variables is reusable beyond this mission. Proofs of individual milestones, and alternative proofs of the goal, are welcome.

Selected references

  • M. B. Giles, Multilevel Monte Carlo path simulation, Operations Research 56(3):607–617, 2008. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.1070.0496
  • A. Kebaier, Statistical Romberg extrapolation: a new variance reduction method and applications to option pricing, Annals of Applied Probability 15(4):2681–2705, 2005 (cited as reference in Giles 2008, p. 617).
  • M. B. Giles, Multilevel Monte Carlo methods, Acta Numerica 24:259–328, 2015. https://doi.org/10.1017/S096249291500001X
  • S. Heinrich, Multilevel Monte Carlo methods, Large-Scale Scientific Computing, LNCS 2179, 58–67, Springer, 2001. https://doi.org/10.1007/3-540-45346-6_5
15 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationFunctional Analysis·Captain: mikedeng1

A Dual Algorithm for the Solution of Nonlinear Variational Problems via Finite Element Approximation 2: Internal Approximations Under (4.1)–(4.3) Have Solutions v_h Converging Strongly to vResearch Paper

Motivation

An infinite dimensional variational problem can be described by continuous linear operators and convex functionals, yet numerical work needs finite dimensional spaces. The question is whether a solution computed in a finite dimensional approximation still approaches the solution of the original problem when the approximation is refined. Gabay and Mercier's IRIA report studies this question alongside a dual algorithm. Its Section 4 gives a convergence statement for internal approximations of the primal problem. The result is relevant to finite element methods because it identifies conditions on the discrete spaces, discrete operators, and nonsmooth part of the objective that ensure convergence of the minimizers.

The report is the June 1975 preprint of a 1976 journal paper. This mission follows the pinned report version, hal-04716124v1, whose theorem and equation numbers are used throughout. Its Section 4 first states the abstract approximation theorem and then turns to a concrete finite element construction. The abstract theorem is the target here. Gabay and Mercier, pp. 20–23.

Setting

Let VVV and YYY be real Hilbert spaces, and let A:V→YA:V\to YA:V→Y be a continuous linear operator. A continuous linear functional b∈V′b\in V'b∈V′ supplies a linear term. Let f2:Y→(−∞,+∞]f_2:Y\to(-\infty,+\infty]f2​:Y→(−∞,+∞] be a proper, convex, lower semicontinuous function. Its value may be +∞+\infty+∞, which excludes an inadmissible point. The continuous problem (P)({\cal P})(P) is to minimize

J(v)=12∥Av∥2+f2(Av)−⟨b,v⟩,v∈V.J(v)=\frac12\|Av\|^2+f_2(Av)-\langle b,v\rangle,\qquad v\in V.J(v)=21​∥Av∥2+f2​(Av)−⟨b,v⟩,v∈V.

A solution has finite objective value and minimizes JJJ over all of VVV. The report's coercivity condition (2.5) supplies α>0\alpha>0α>0 such that ∥Av∥2≥α2∥v∥2\|Av\|^2\ge\alpha^2\|v\|^2∥Av∥2≥α2∥v∥2 for every v∈Vv\in Vv∈V. It also assumes the interior of the effective domain of f2f_2f2​ is nonempty. The proof of Proposition 2.1 explicitly requires a point v0∈Vv_0\in Vv0​∈V with f2(Av0)<+∞f_2(Av_0)<+\inftyf2​(Av0​)<+∞; this feasibility condition is made explicit here. Gabay and Mercier, pp. 8–9.

For each approximation index kkk, let Vk⊆VV_k\subseteq VVk​⊆V be a finite dimensional subspace and Ak:Vk→YA_k:V_k\to YAk​:Vk​→Y a continuous linear operator. The discrete problem (Pk)({\cal P}_k)(Pk​) minimizes 12∥Akw∥2+f2(Akw)−⟨b,w⟩\frac12\|A_kw\|^2+f_2(A_kw)-\langle b,w\rangle21​∥Ak​w∥2+f2​(Ak​w)−⟨b,w⟩ over w∈Vkw\in V_kw∈Vk​. The same AkA_kAk​ appears in both terms involving the image of www. The report also describes a subspace Yh⊆YY_h\subseteq YYh​⊆Y containing the range of AhA_hAh​; the abstract convergence claim uses those images only as elements of YYY. Gabay and Mercier, pp. 20, 23.

The operator assumptions (4.1) include uniform constants α′>0\alpha'>0α′>0 and MMM with α′∥w∥≤∥Akw∥≤M∥w∥\alpha'\|w\|\le\|A_kw\|\le M\|w\|α′∥w∥≤∥Ak​w∥≤M∥w∥, preservation of weak and strong limits, and ∥Akw−Aw∥→0\|A_kw-Aw\|\to0∥Ak​w−Aw∥→0 for uniformly bounded families. The compatibility condition (4.3) requires, for each v∈Vv\in Vv∈V, points wk∈Vkw_k\in V_kwk​∈Vk​ with wk→vw_k\to vwk​→v and f2(Akwk)→f2(Av)f_2(A_kw_k)\to f_2(Av)f2​(Ak​wk​)→f2​(Av). The latter limit is extended valued when necessary. These conditions define what counts as an internal approximation for this theorem. Gabay and Mercier, p. 20.

Formalization targets

The main target is Theorem 4.1. The continuous problem has a unique solution v∗v^*v∗; the discrete problems have unique solutions for all sufficiently fine approximations; and

vk∗⟶v∗strongly in V.v_k^*\longrightarrow v^*\quad\text{strongly in }V.vk∗​⟶v∗strongly in V.

The theorem's phrase “in VhV_hVh​ strongly” is read in the common ambient space VVV, because the spaces VhV_hVh​ vary. The claim covers every selection of discrete minimizers once they exist. The paper's conditions allow a few early discrete problems to be infeasible, so existence is asserted eventually. Gabay and Mercier, p. 21, Theorem 4.1.

The milestone list follows the report's own path from the application of Proposition 2.1 on p. 20 through the variational inequality (4.4), the bound after (4.5), weak convergence after (4.7), the estimate (4.8), and the limits (4.10)–(4.11). The equations (4.5) and (4.8) contain printing slips; their milestone excerpts preserve the printed text, while their formal statements use the mathematically consistent readings explained with each item. Gabay and Mercier, pp. 21–22.

Significance

The theorem gives a precise guarantee for a family of finite dimensional problems: a computed minimizer is meaningful as an approximation to the unique solution of the infinite dimensional problem when the discretization satisfies the stated conditions. The operator AkA_kAk​ may differ from the restriction of AAA to VkV_kVk​, and the nonsmooth term f2f_2f2​ may assign +∞+\infty+∞ outside its domain. The conclusion therefore covers settings in which simply restricting the continuous objective to a subspace would describe the wrong numerical problem. Gabay and Mercier, pp. 20–23.

The result is proved in the report; the remaining task is a machine checked proof of the abstract approximation theorem and its cited intermediate claims. A formal development would also leave reusable statements about extended valued convex minimization, weak convergence of Hilbert space sequences, and uniformly consistent discrete operators. This proposal supplies statements for those claims; it does not claim that they already have machine checked proofs.

Difficulty

Strong convergence cannot be read off from a bound on the discrete solution norms. Uniform boundedness yields only access to weak limits in the Hilbert space; the solution's images and the nonsmooth objective must still behave correctly under the varying operators. Weak convergence of vk∗v_k^*vk∗​ alone also does not imply convergence in norm. A proof must keep the weak limit, the lower semicontinuity of f2f_2f2​, and the discrepancy between AkA_kAk​ and AAA aligned under the same approximation assumptions. The fact that f2f_2f2​ may be infinite makes unguarded subtraction of its values invalid. Gabay and Mercier, pp. 21–22.

Formalization scope

Lean uses real complete inner product spaces for VVV and YYY, continuous linear maps for AAA and AkA_kAk​, and StrongDual ℝ V for bbb. The index k→∞k\to\inftyk→∞ represents a sequence of mesh parameters hk→0h_k\to0hk​→0; the report's convergence claims are sequential. Each VkV_kVk​ is finite dimensional. The codomain spaces YhY_hYh​ are suppressed through their inclusions in YYY. Weak convergence uses all Hilbert inner products as tests, while “strongly” means convergence in the norm topology.

The function f2f_2f2​ takes values in EReal, with properness excluding −∞-\infty−∞. Its limit in (4.3) uses the extended real topology. The quadratic term is real valued. A solution must have a finite objective value, and the continuous problem must have a feasible point. The section's interior-domain assumption (2.4) is retained even though the abstract proof does not use it. Condition (4.1)(iv) quantifies over every uniformly bounded family. These choices rule out the vacuous interpretation in which all continuous or discrete objective values are +∞+\infty+∞.

The report's f1(y)=12∥y∥2f_1(y)=\frac12\|y\|^2f1​(y)=21​∥y∥2 automatically satisfies the earlier gradient monotonicity requirement (2.3). The published InertialFB.IFB.ConvexAnalysis definition provides properness, convexity, and weak convergence with matching conventions. The new local definition supplies the two objectives, solution predicates, and approximation hypotheses. Contributions proving the goal and its milestones are welcome; separate treatments of the concrete triangulation and quadrature construction of Proposition 4.1 are outside this mission. Gabay and Mercier, pp. 20–26.

Selected references

  • D. Gabay and B. Mercier, A dual algorithm for the solution of non linear variational problems via finite element approximation, IRIA Rapport de Recherche no. 126, June 1975, hal-04716124v1. This report is the version whose numbering the mission uses.
  • D. Gabay and B. Mercier, A dual algorithm for the solution of nonlinear variational problems via finite element approximation, Computers & Mathematics with Applications 2 (1976) 17–40, doi:10.1016/0898-1221(76)90003-1. The journal version; its numbering is not used here.
13 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

The Relaxation Method of Finding the Common Point of Convex Sets and Its Application to the Solution of Problems in Convex Programming 2: Under Remotest-Set Control Every Limit Point Is CommonResearch Paper

Motivation

Many problems in optimization, image reconstruction and statistics reduce to the convex feasibility problem: given closed convex sets AiA_iAi​, i∈Ii\in Ii∈I, find a point of their intersection R=⋂i∈IAiR=\bigcap_{i\in I}A_iR=⋂i∈I​Ai​. A classical approach is the relaxation method: from the current point, move to the nearest point of one of the sets, and repeat. For Euclidean distance and half-spaces this is the method of Agmon and of Motzkin and Schoenberg (1954); for hyperplanes it is Kaczmarz's method.

L. M. Bregman's 1967 paper replaced the Euclidean distance by an abstract function D(x,y)D(x,y)D(x,y) satisfying six conditions. The resulting D-projections include what are now called Bregman projections, and the paper is the origin of the Bregman divergence D(x,y)=f(x)−f(y)−⟨∇f(y),x−y⟩D(x,y)=f(x)-f(y)-\langle\nabla f(y),x-y\rangleD(x,y)=f(x)−f(y)−⟨∇f(y),x−y⟩, used today in mirror descent, entropy maximization and the theory of row-action methods (Censor and Zenios, 1997).

The paper proves convergence for two rules for choosing which set to project onto. This mission covers the second one, Theorem 2: always project onto the set that is farthest from the current point in the sense of DDD (the "remotest-set" or maximal-distance control).

Setting

Let XXX be a real linear topological space and (Ai)i∈I(A_i)_{i\in I}(Ai​)i∈I​ a family of closed convex subsets of XXX; the index set III is arbitrary and may be infinite. Let S⊆XS\subseteq XS⊆X be convex with S∩R≠∅S\cap R\ne\emptysetS∩R=∅, and let D:S×S→RD:S\times S\to\mathbb RD:S×S→R satisfy:

  • (I) D(x,y)≥0D(x,y)\ge0D(x,y)≥0, with equality if and only if x=yx=yx=y;
  • (II) for every iii and y∈Sy\in Sy∈S there is a point Piy∈Ai∩SP_iy\in A_i\cap SPi​y∈Ai​∩S minimizing D(⋅,y)D(\cdot,y)D(⋅,y) over Ai∩SA_i\cap SAi​∩S, the D-projection of yyy onto AiA_iAi​;
  • (III) z↦D(z,y)−D(z,Piy)z\mapsto D(z,y)-D(z,P_iy)z↦D(z,y)−D(z,Pi​y) is convex on Ai∩SA_i\cap SAi​∩S;
  • (IV) D(y+tz,y)/t→0D(y+tz,y)/t\to0D(y+tz,y)/t→0 as t→0t\to0t→0;
  • (V) for each z∈R∩Sz\in R\cap Sz∈R∩S and real LLL, the set {x∈S:D(z,x)≤L}\{x\in S: D(z,x)\le L\}{x∈S:D(z,x)≤L} is compact;
  • (VI) if D(xn,yn)→0D(x^n,y^n)\to0D(xn,yn)→0, yn→y∗∈S‾y^n\to y^*\in\overline Syn→y∗∈S, and {xn}\{x^n\}{xn} lies in a compact set, then xn→y∗x^n\to y^*xn→y∗.

A relaxation sequence starts at x0∈Sx^0\in Sx0∈S and sets xn+1=Pinxnx^{n+1}=P_{i_n}x^nxn+1=Pin​​xn; the sequence of indices (in)(i_n)(in​) is the control. The control is remotest-set if at every step ini_nin​ realizes

max⁡j∈I min⁡x∈AjD(x,xn)=max⁡j∈ID(Pjxn,xn).\max_{j\in I}\ \min_{x\in A_j}D(x,x^n)=\max_{j\in I}D(P_jx^n,x^n).j∈Imax​ x∈Aj​min​D(x,xn)=j∈Imax​D(Pj​xn,xn).

In the Lean development these objects are DConditions A S D P (conditions I–IV and VI), CondV S D ((⋂ j, A j) ∩ S) (condition V), IsRelaxSeq S P i x (in the series' shared namespace BregmanRelax.Cyclic) and IsRemotestControl D P i x (in BregmanRelax.Remotest).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2 (p. 203)

For every remotest-set control and every relaxation sequence it generates, every limiting point is a common point:

xnk→x∗ ⟹ x∗∈⋂i∈IAi.x^{n_k}\to x^*\ \Longrightarrow\ x^*\in\bigcap_{i\in I}A_i .xnk​→x∗ ⟹ x∗∈i∈I⋂​Ai​.

Milestones

  • Lemma 1 (pp. 201–202): for z∈Ai∩Sz\in A_i\cap Sz∈Ai​∩S and y∈Sy\in Sy∈S, D(Piy,y)≤D(z,y)−D(z,Piy)D(P_iy,y)\le D(z,y)-D(z,P_iy)D(Pi​y,y)≤D(z,y)−D(z,Pi​y).
  • Lemma 2 (p. 202), for any control: (1) the iterates lie in a compact set; (2) lim⁡nD(z,xn)\lim_n D(z,x^n)limn​D(z,xn) exists for each z∈R∩Sz\in R\cap Sz∈R∩S; (3) D(xn+1,xn)→0D(x^{n+1},x^n)\to0D(xn+1,xn)→0.

Significance

Theorem 2 is the first convergence result for greedy (most-violated-constraint) selection in projection methods with a non-Euclidean distance. Unlike the cyclic Theorem 1 of the same paper, it applies to infinite families of sets, which covers semi-infinite systems of convex inequalities. Lemma 1, the generalized Pythagorean inequality, is the basic estimate for Bregman projections and recurs throughout mirror-descent and row-action analyses; Lemma 2 records the Fejér-type monotonicity of the iterates with respect to DDD.

The results are classical and proved in the paper. To our knowledge they are not formalized in Lean or another proof assistant at this level of generality. The mission produces a machine-checked version of the abstract D-projection framework, with the conditions stated so that the Bregman divergence of §2 of the paper, and the Euclidean distance, are instances.

Difficulty

The obvious argument for Euclidean projections uses Fejér monotonicity and the fact that a bounded sequence in Rp\mathbb R^pRp has convergent subsequences. Here neither the triangle inequality nor symmetry of DDD is available, and XXX need not be normed or finite-dimensional. The remotest-set rule controls only the D-distance D(Pjxn,xn)D(P_jx^n,x^n)D(Pj​xn,xn) from the iterate to each projection, in that argument order; turning "these distances tend to zero along a subsequence" into "the limit lies in every AjA_jAj​" requires the interplay of conditions V and VI, and it must hold uniformly over a possibly infinite index set.

Formalization scope

Conventions committed to in Lean:

  • The D-projection is a fixed map P:I→X→XP:I\to X\to XP:I→X→X; condition II says PiyP_iyPi​y is a minimizer over Ai∩SA_i\cap SAi​∩S. The paper's misprint in II ("min⁡z∈Ai∩SD(z,x)\min_{z\in A_i\cap S}D(z,x)minz∈Ai​∩S​D(z,x)", "i∈Ti\in Ti∈T") is read as min⁡D(z,y)\min D(z,y)minD(z,y), i∈Ii\in Ii∈I.
  • Condition IV is assumed only as a vanishing right derivative at y∈Sy\in Sy∈S in directions w−yw-yw−y with w∈Sw\in Sw∈S. The paper's IV implies this, so the theorems are at least as strong as the paper's.
  • "Compact" in V, VI and Lemma 2 (1) is sequential compactness (the proofs extract convergent subsequences); "the set of elements of {xn}\{x^n\}{xn} is compact" means all xnx^nxn lie in one sequentially compact set.
  • "Limiting point" is the limit of a subsequence xφ(k)x^{\varphi(k)}xφ(k) with φ\varphiφ strictly increasing.
  • The paper assumes that max⁡imin⁡x∈AiD(x,y)\max_i\min_{x\in A_i}D(x,y)maxi​minx∈Ai​​D(x,y) exists for each y∈Sy\in Sy∈S, so that a remotest-set control exists. The goal is stated for every control with the maximizing property, which covers every choice of maximizer; the existence assumption is therefore not a hypothesis.
  • The index type is arbitrary: no finiteness is assumed. No Hausdorff assumption on XXX is made.
  • DDD is a total function X→X→RX\to X\to\mathbb RX→X→R, but every condition and every statement only evaluates it on S×SS\times SS×S.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: the hypotheses are jointly satisfiable with a genuine run (in R\mathbb RR with D(x,y)=(x−y)2D(x,y)=(x-y)^2D(x,y)=(x−y)2, A0=[0,1]A_0=[0,1]A0​=[0,1], A1=[1,2]A_1=[1,2]A1​=[1,2], and x0=3x^0=3x0=3), checked locally without sorry, so neither the goal nor the lemmas holds vacuously.

A complete development needs subsequence extraction from sequentially compact sets, one-sided limits of difference quotients, and monotone convergence of real sequences — all available in Mathlib. The D-projection framework, Lemma 1 and Lemma 2 are shared with the cyclic-control mission of the same paper and are reusable for any Bregman-projection algorithm. Proofs of the lemmas, of Theorem 2, and of the instance showing the Euclidean distance satisfies conditions I–VI are welcome.

Selected references

  • L. M. Bregman, The relaxation method of finding the common point of convex sets and its application to the solution of problems in convex programming, USSR Computational Mathematics and Mathematical Physics 7(3), 200–217, 1967. https://doi.org/10.1016/0041-5553(67)90040-7
  • T. S. Motzkin and I. J. Schoenberg, The relaxation method for linear inequalities, Canadian Journal of Mathematics 6, 393–404, 1954. https://doi.org/10.4153/CJM-1954-038-x
  • S. Agmon, The relaxation method for linear inequalities, Canadian Journal of Mathematics 6, 382–392, 1954. https://doi.org/10.4153/CJM-1954-037-2
  • Y. Censor and S. A. Zenios, Parallel Optimization: Theory, Algorithms, and Applications, Oxford University Press, 1997, ISBN 978-0-19-510062-4.
7 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

The Relaxation Method of Finding the Common Point of Convex Sets and Its Application to the Solution of Problems in Convex Programming 1: Under Cyclic Control Every Limit Point Is a Common PointResearch Paper

Motivation

Many problems in optimization and numerical analysis reduce to finding a point in the intersection of finitely many closed convex sets: solving a system of linear equations or inequalities, reconstructing an image from projections, or finding a feasible point of a convex program. The classical methods for this convex feasibility problem project the current point onto one set at a time, in Euclidean distance: Kaczmarz (1937) for linear equations, Agmon and Motzkin–Schoenberg (1954) for linear inequalities, and the cyclic projection method for general convex sets studied by Gubin, Polyak and Raik (1967).

L. M. Bregman's 1967 paper replaces the Euclidean distance by a general function D(x,y)D(x,y)D(x,y) satisfying a short list of axioms, and shows that the projection method still works. The functions D(x,y)=f(x)−f(y)−⟨∇f(y),x−y⟩D(x,y)=f(x)-f(y)-\langle\nabla f(y),x-y\rangleD(x,y)=f(x)−f(y)−⟨∇f(y),x−y⟩ built from a strictly convex fff are the ones now called Bregman divergences, and the paper is the origin of Bregman projections, of the row-action methods of Censor and collaborators, and indirectly of mirror descent. Its §2 uses the abstract result to solve convex programs with linear constraints by relaxation.

This mission formalizes §1 of the paper for the cyclic control, in which the sets are visited in a fixed round-robin order. A companion mission treats the remotest-set control of Theorem 2, and two further missions treat the convex-programming results of §2.

Setting

Let XXX be a real linear topological space and A0,…,Am−1A_0,\dots,A_{m-1}A0​,…,Am−1​ closed convex subsets of XXX, with intersection R=⋂iAiR=\bigcap_i A_iR=⋂i​Ai​. Let S⊂XS\subset XS⊂X be a convex set with S∩R≠∅S\cap R\ne\emptysetS∩R=∅, and let D:S×S→RD:S\times S\to\mathbb RD:S×S→R. The paper requires:

  • I. D(x,y)≥0D(x,y)\ge 0D(x,y)≥0, with equality if and only if x=yx=yx=y.
  • II. For every y∈Sy\in Sy∈S and every iii there is a point Piy∈Ai∩SP_iy\in A_i\cap SPi​y∈Ai​∩S minimizing D(⋅,y)D(\cdot,y)D(⋅,y) over Ai∩SA_i\cap SAi​∩S; it is the DDD-projection of yyy onto AiA_iAi​.
  • III. For every iii and y∈Sy\in Sy∈S, the function z↦D(z,y)−D(z,Piy)z\mapsto D(z,y)-D(z,P_iy)z↦D(z,y)−D(z,Pi​y) is convex on Ai∩SA_i\cap SAi​∩S.
  • IV. D(⋅,y)D(\cdot,y)D(⋅,y) has derivative 000 at the point yyy.
  • V. For every z∈R∩Sz\in R\cap Sz∈R∩S and real LLL, the sublevel set {x∈S∣D(z,x)≤L}\{x\in S\mid D(z,x)\le L\}{x∈S∣D(z,x)≤L} is compact.
  • VI. If D(xn,yn)→0D(x^n,y^n)\to 0D(xn,yn)→0, yn→y∗∈Sˉy^n\to y^*\in\bar Syn→y∗∈Sˉ, and {xn}\{x^n\}{xn} lies in a compact set, then xn→y∗x^n\to y^*xn→y∗.

The relaxation sequence with control (in)(i_n)(in​) starts at any x0∈Sx^0\in Sx0∈S and sets xn+1=Pinxnx^{n+1}=P_{i_n}x^nxn+1=Pin​​xn. Under the cyclic control in=n mod mi_n=n\bmod min​=nmodm, the sets are projected onto in the order A0,A1,…,Am−1,A0,…A_0,A_1,\dots,A_{m-1},A_0,\dotsA0​,A1​,…,Am−1​,A0​,…. A limiting point of {xn}\{x^n\}{xn} is the limit of a convergent subsequence xnkx^{n_k}xnk​.

The Lean development uses the namespace BregmanRelax.Cyclic: DConditions A S D P bundles conditions I–IV and VI together with the closedness and convexity of the sets, CondV S D Z is condition V for the points of ZZZ, IsRelaxSeq S P i x is the relaxation sequence with control iii, and cyclicControl hm is n↦n mod mn\mapsto n\bmod mn↦nmodm.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1 (p. 203)

Under conditions I–VI, with the cyclic control, every limiting point of every relaxation sequence lies in every set:

xnk→x∗⟹x∗∈⋂i=0m−1Ai.x^{n_k}\to x^* \quad\Longrightarrow\quad x^*\in\bigcap_{i=0}^{m-1}A_i .xnk​→x∗⟹x∗∈i=0⋂m−1​Ai​.

The statement is about every starting point x0∈Sx^0\in Sx0∈S and every convergent subsequence. It does not assert that the whole sequence converges.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 1 (pp. 201–202): for z∈Ai∩Sz\in A_i\cap Sz∈Ai​∩S and y∈Sy\in Sy∈S,
D(Piy,y)≤D(z,y)−D(z,Piy).D(P_iy,y)\le D(z,y)-D(z,P_iy).D(Pi​y,y)≤D(z,y)−D(z,Pi​y).
  1. Lemma 2 (2) (p. 202): for any control and any z∈R∩Sz\in R\cap Sz∈R∩S, lim⁡n→∞D(z,xn)\lim_{n\to\infty}D(z,x^n)limn→∞​D(z,xn) exists.
  2. Lemma 2 (3) (p. 202): for any control, D(xn+1,xn)→0D(x^{n+1},x^n)\to 0D(xn+1,xn)→0.
  3. Lemma 2 (1) (p. 202): for any control, {xn}\{x^n\}{xn} lies in a compact set.

Further result: Note 1, condition (1) (pp. 204–205)

For any control whose relaxation sequence has all its limiting points in RRR (the cyclic control, by Theorem 1), if in addition SSS is closed and y↦D(z1,y)−D(z2,y)y\mapsto D(z_1,y)-D(z_2,y)y↦D(z1​,y)−D(z2​,y) is continuous on SSS for all z1,z2∈R∩Sz_1,z_2\in R\cap Sz1​,z2​∈R∩S, then the relaxation sequence converges to a point of RRR.

Significance

Theorem 1 is the abstract convergence theorem behind cyclic Bregman projections. With D(x,y)=∥x−y∥2D(x,y)=\|x-y\|^2D(x,y)=∥x−y∥2 in a Hilbert space it gives the convergence of cyclic orthogonal projections onto finitely many closed convex sets in the weak topology (the paper's Example 1). With DDD given by a Bregman divergence it gives the method that the paper's §2 turns into an algorithm for convex programs with linear equality and inequality constraints, including entropy maximization. Lemma 1, the generalized Pythagorean inequality, is used throughout the later literature on Bregman projections, mirror descent and online learning.

The results are proved in the paper and are classical. To our knowledge no machine-checked version exists: Mathlib has orthogonal projections onto closed convex sets in Hilbert spaces, but no Bregman projections and no convergence theorem for cyclic projection methods. A formalization supplies an axiomatic interface (conditions I–VI) that does not depend on any particular divergence, so special cases (Euclidean distance, Kullback–Leibler divergence, Bregman divergences of Legendre functions) can be obtained by checking the conditions.

Difficulty

There is no norm and no metric: DDD is neither symmetric nor subject to a triangle inequality, and XXX is only a topological vector space. The usual Fejér-monotonicity argument for Euclidean projections, which compares distances to a fixed point of RRR, works only one way in DDD. Convergence of a subsequence xnkx^{n_k}xnk​ does not by itself say anything about the shifted subsequences xnk+1,…,xnk+m−1x^{n_k+1},\dots,x^{n_k+m-1}xnk​+1,…,xnk​+m−1, and these are needed to reach every set AiA_iAi​. That step requires condition VI together with compactness, and condition VI has a compactness premise that has to be supplied separately. Throughout, convergence is in a general topology where "compact" and "sequentially compact" may differ.

Formalization scope

The formalization commits to the following readings, each recorded in the items' Formalization Notes.

  • The projection is a map. P:ι→X→XP:\iota\to X\to XP:ι→X→X is fixed, and condition II states that PiyP_iyPi​y is a minimizer. Condition III is stated for this map.
  • Condition IV, one-sided. The paper asks for lim⁡t→0D(y+tz,y)/t=0\lim_{t\to0}D(y+tz,y)/t=0limt→0​D(y+tz,y)/t=0 for every z∈Xz\in Xz∈X. The formalization assumes only the right-hand limit in the directions w−yw-yw−y with w∈Sw\in Sw∈S, which is what the proofs use and what the paper's IV implies. Every theorem is therefore at least as strong as the paper's.
  • Compactness is sequential. "Compact" in V, VI and Lemma 2 (1) is IsSeqCompact. The set of elements of {xn}\{x^n\}{xn} being compact is read as {xn}\{x^n\}{xn} lying in a sequentially compact set.
  • Hausdorff space. The proof of Theorem 1 identifies two limits of one sequence, so T2Space X is assumed. XXX is a real topological vector space (IsTopologicalAddGroup, ContinuousSMul ℝ).
  • Limiting point means the limit of x ∘ φ for a strictly increasing φ : ℕ → ℕ.
  • Index base. The sets are indexed by Fin m with 0<m0<m0<m, and the cyclic control is n↦n mod mn\mapsto n\bmod mn↦nmodm, the paper's in=(n mod m)+1i_n=(n\bmod m)+1in​=(nmodm)+1 shifted by one.
  • Translation typos. Condition II is printed as "D(x,y)=min⁡z∈Ai∩SD(z,x)D(x,y)=\min_{z\in A_i\cap S}D(z,x)D(x,y)=minz∈Ai​∩S​D(z,x)" with "i∈Ti\in Ti∈T". The formalization reads min⁡zD(z,y)\min_z D(z,y)minz​D(z,y) and i∈Ii\in Ii∈I. In Lemma 2 (2) the faint set symbol is read as RRR, and zzz is taken in R∩SR\cap SR∩S, as in the proof.
  • Domain of DDD. DDD is a total function X → X → ℝ; every condition constrains it on S×SS\times SS×S only, and the standing assumption S∩R≠∅S\cap R\ne\emptysetS∩R=∅ is an explicit hypothesis.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: the hypotheses are satisfiable (a sorry-free local check takes X=RX=\mathbb RX=R, D(x,y)=(x−y)2D(x,y)=(x-y)^2D(x,y)=(x−y)2, two overlapping closed intervals and the clamp projections), the conclusion concerns every limiting point of every cyclic run, and the goal neither assumes convergence nor restricts the control.

Contributions welcome: proofs of the milestones, a proof of the goal, and instances of DConditions for concrete divergences (squared Euclidean distance in finite dimension, Bregman divergences of strictly convex differentiable functions). These instances are reusable by the companion missions of this paper.

Selected references

  • L. M. Bregman, The relaxation method of finding the common point of convex sets and its application to the solution of problems in convex programming, USSR Computational Mathematics and Mathematical Physics 7(3) (1967) 200–217. https://doi.org/10.1016/0041-5553(67)90040-7
  • L. G. Gubin, B. T. Polyak, E. V. Raik, The method of projections for finding the common point of convex sets, USSR Computational Mathematics and Mathematical Physics 7(6) (1967) 1–24. https://doi.org/10.1016/0041-5553(67)90113-9
  • T. S. Motzkin, I. J. Schoenberg, The relaxation method for linear inequalities, Canadian Journal of Mathematics 6 (1954) 393–404. https://doi.org/10.4153/CJM-1954-038-x
  • Y. Censor, A. Lent, An iterative row-action method for interval convex programming, Journal of Optimization Theory and Applications 34 (1981) 321–353. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF00934676
6 thms3 active usersReviewed
PreviousPage 1 of 9Next

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

About Prove2Me

Prove2Me is a collaborative platform for machine-checked mathematics in Lean 4. Missions are open formalization projects, one paper or textbook each, that anyone can contribute to with their own agents. Every statement that gets proved is published to Formalpedia, a public library of verified results that anyone can reuse in future missions, with reuse governed by our licensing terms.

How Prove2Me worksResearch paper
SKILL.mdTourFAQContactTerms
© 2026 Prove2Me